JP5831612B1 - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a problem that a player gets bored with a game at an early stage. At least character information indicating the contents of the game is displayed on the display means. Character information corresponding to a plurality of types of languages displayed on the display means is stored in the storage means. The language type of the character information displayed on the display means is determined by the determination means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. Character information corresponding to the language type determined by the determining means is acquired from the memory means and displayed on the display means by the display control means. Accordingly, since the language type displayed on the display means can be switched based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the contents of the game are displayed in various languages and various effects are given to the player. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage. [Selection] Figure 5

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine that draws a lottery in accordance with a winning game ball at a starting port and displays a variation effect or a jackpot effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such effects, characters are displayed and the player is notified of the content of the game, the state of the game, and the like. In such a pachinko machine, there has been proposed an apparatus that allows a player to play a game in an easy-to-understand manner by displaying various comments on a liquid crystal display in characters.

JP 2007-105333 A

  In this type of pachinko machine, the displayed language is only displayed in characters of a predetermined language, and the game becomes monotonous by not being able to switch to a different language, and the player gets bored early. There was a bug that would

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a player from getting bored early.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is a launching means capable of launching a game ball, a plurality of entrance means capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means, and the entrance Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the means, a privilege granting means for granting a benefit that is advantageous to the player, and an input that is likely to be advantageous to the player among the plurality of ball entry means based on the gaming state. Setting means for setting the ball means, information display means for displaying information including at least character information as information corresponding to the entrance means advantageously set by the setting means, and character information indicating at least the contents of the game And an effect display means for displaying at least one of the predetermined effects, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when a specific effect is displayed on the effect display means, Information display hand On the basis of the language type corresponding to the character information displayed on each of the effect display means the establishment of a predetermined condition and, determining means for determining a plurality of language type, the language type determined by the determining means A different specific address is set for each, and is set to a plurality of addresses moved corresponding to a plurality of address information indicating a predetermined address from each of the specific addresses, and the language type corresponding to the specific address is set. It has a plurality of individual storage areas for storing character information, and shows the same display contents in the individual storage areas set at addresses moved in correspondence with the same address information from the specific addresses. Based on the storage means for storing the character information corresponding to the language type in the individual storage area and the establishment of the display condition, the information The acquisition means for acquiring the address information corresponding to the display content of the character information displayed on the display means or the effect display means, and the specific address corresponding to the language type determined by the determination means as a reference, Selection means for selecting the character information stored in the individual storage area moved by an address corresponding to the address information acquired by the acquisition means, and the information display for the character information selected by the selection means Display control means for displaying on the means or the effect display means.
A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, wherein the information display means is arranged at a position where the player can visually recognize the information.

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the launching means capable of launching a game ball, the plurality of launching means capable of entering the game balls launched by the launching means, and the game ball in the entrance means Based on having entered the ball, a privilege granting unit for granting a privilege advantageous to the player, and, based on the gaming state, a ball entry unit that is likely to be advantageous to the player is set out of the plurality of ball entering units. Setting means, information display means for displaying information including at least character information as information corresponding to the entrance means advantageously set by the setting means, at least character information indicating the content of the game, and a predetermined effect Effect display means for displaying at least one of the above, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when a specific effect is displayed on the effect display means, the information display means, Production display hand On the basis of the language type corresponding to the character information on the establishment of a predetermined condition, determining means and the particular address which is different for each of the language type determined by the determining means for determining a plurality of language type to be displayed on each of the Is set to a plurality of addresses moved corresponding to a plurality of address information indicating predetermined addresses from the specific addresses, and character information of the language type corresponding to the specific addresses is stored. The character information indicating the same display content is stored in the individual storage area set to an address moved corresponding to the same address information from each of the specific addresses. Storage means stored corresponding to the language type in the individual storage area, and the information display means or the previous one based on the establishment of the display condition Obtained by the obtaining means based on the acquisition means for obtaining the address information corresponding to the display content of the character information displayed on the effect display means, and the specific address corresponding to the language type determined by the decision means. Selecting means for selecting the character information stored in the individual storage area moved by an address corresponding to the address information, and displaying the character information selected by the selecting means as the information display means or the effect Display control means for displaying on the display means.

Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.
According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the information display means is arranged at a position where the player can visually recognize the information. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game easily.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen at the time of language setting displayed on a side display device, (b) is the actual display screen of the spec display mode displayed on a side display device. FIG. (A) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen of the normal display mode displayed on a side display device, (b) is the actual display screen of the probability variation display mode displayed on a side display device. FIG. (A) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen of the jackpot display mode displayed with a side display device, (b) is the notice character at the time of the Japanese setting displayed on a 3rd symbol display device (C) is the figure which illustrated the notice character at the time of the Danish setting displayed on the 3rd symbol display device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in a main controller. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller, and (b) schematically shows the correspondence between the first random number counter C1 and the special symbol jackpot determination value. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table, and (d) is a judgment value per second random number counter C4 and a normal symbol. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of these. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation | variation pattern table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of fluctuation classification counter CS1 and fluctuation classification at the time of jackpot. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of departure (normal), and (d) is a diagram of the variation type counter CS1 at the time of departure (probability variation). It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence with a fluctuation | variation classification. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the audio lamp control device, and (b) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the audio lamp control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the work RAM in a display control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a sub display control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the work RAM in a sub display control apparatus. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the sub display data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing a sound editing / output process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the MPU in the display control device. . It is the flowchart which showed the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. (A) is the flowchart which showed the opening command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the round number command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. . It is the flowchart which showed the ending command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the language setting command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a sub display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the boot process performed by MPU in a sub display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the language initial setting process performed by MPU in a sub display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the sub display control device, and (b) shows a V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the sub display control device. It is a flowchart. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a sub display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the specification information command process performed by MPU in a sub display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the change start command process performed by MPU in a sub display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot information command process performed by MPU in a sub display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a sub display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a sub display control apparatus, (b) showed the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a sub display control apparatus. It is a flowchart. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a sub display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the language setting process performed by MPU in a sub display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the input detection process performed by MPU in a sub display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the camera setting process performed by MPU in a sub display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the discharge detection process performed by MPU in a sub display control apparatus.

  Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 8) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, there are a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface, a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side, and a side display unit 600 that is pivotally supported on the right side of the front frame body 14. Is provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  An upper shaft portion 610a and a lower shaft portion 610b for pivotally supporting the side display unit 600 are provided at the upper and lower portions on the right side of the inner frame 12, respectively. The side display unit 600 includes a side display device 901 that is rotatably fixed to the right side of the inner frame 12 and is configured by a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The side display device 901 has a vertically long display area, and is configured to allow an input operation when the player touches the screen. Although details will be described later, the side display unit 901 displays spec information such as the jackpot probability of the pachinko machine 10, a setting screen for switching the language to be displayed, and the like.

  The player can obtain a wide variety of information related to the game by recognizing display information displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the game board 13 to be described later and information displayed on the side display device 901, respectively. The game can be performed while obtaining a lot of information from the pachinko machine 10.

  Since the side display unit 600 is pivotally supported so as to be pivotable in the front-rear direction, even when the pachinko machine 10 is installed side by side on an island facility in an amusement shop, the front frame 14 and the inner frame of the adjacent pachinko machine 10 When the frame 12 is opened, the side display unit 600 can be prevented from hindering the opening operation.

  In the present embodiment, the side display unit 600 is configured to be rotatable, but may be configured to be fixed to the front frame 14. In this case, the side display unit 600 is fixed to the front frame 14 so as not to protrude from the outer shape of the front frame 14. Specifically, the side display unit 600 is arranged at the position of the electrical decoration part 33 provided on the outer periphery of the window part 14c. Moreover, the side display unit 600 (side display device 901) is fixed by projecting the shape of the electrical decoration part 33 so as to protrude to the front side, and fixing the side display unit 600 (side display device 901) inside the projected part. The space for arranging 600 can be enlarged, and the side display device 901 configured with a large display area can be arranged.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is used by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or changing the effect of Super Reach. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which the various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, there are 3 types of “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”. There are two stages. And, various effects such as variation effects and reach effects that are performed along with the entry to the first entrance 64 (start prize), which will be described later, are designed according to the theme given to each stage. Has been. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period when the fluctuating effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, the “city stage” → “empty stage” "→" Island Stage "→" City Stage "→ ... Further, immediately after the power is turned on, the “city street stage” is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the 3rd symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen for a super reach effect mode during normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed to the super reach. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the wood screw is provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 8) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first entrance 64, a special symbol (first design) is drawn, and when the ball passes the second entrance 67, a normal symbol (first 2 designs) will be drawn. In the special symbol lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 64, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and if it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, Is also determined. When a special symbol wins, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds elapses or 10 balls are won). ) Is released and the opening is repeated 4 or 16 times (4 rounds or 16 rounds). As a result, a large amount of balls wins at the specific winning port 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are four types of special jackpot types: “Big Jack A”, “Big Jack B”, “Big Jack C”, and “Big Jack D”. After the special game state is over, The game value (game value) according to these jackpot types is given to the player.

  In addition, when the special symbol (the first symbol) is drawn, after the special symbol variable display is started on the first symbol display device 37 and a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, A special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball is held is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display. It is shown by the device 37 and also in the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 remains, the next special symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is performed. Is started. Note that the specific winning opening 65 a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 enters the special gaming state is provided immediately below the first entrance 64. Therefore, during the special game state, the player hits a ball in an attempt to win the specific winning opening 65a, so that a lot of balls also enter the first entrance 64. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 is maximum (four times).

  On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined. When hitting the normal symbol, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is released for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. It becomes a state. That is, when a normal symbol is hit, it becomes easy for a ball to enter the first entrance 64, and as a result, a special symbol is easily drawn.

  In addition, when the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) has elapsed, A normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the second entrance 67 while the fluctuation display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is the first symbol display device 37. And is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is performed. Is started.

  As described above, there are four types of special symbol jackpot types: “Big Jack A”, “Big Jack B”, “Big Jack C”, and “Big Jack D”.

  In both cases of “big hit A” and “big hit C”, the game shifts to a special game state (16R big hit) with 16 rounds. In the case of “big jackpot A”, as a value added after the big hit, the state shifts to a high probability state (special symbol probable state) of the special symbol from the end of the big hit until the next big hit. On the other hand, in the case of “big hit C”, as the added value after the big hit, the state shifts to the “short time state of normal symbols” in the period from the end of the big hit until the special symbol changes 100 times.

  Here, the “high probability state of a special symbol” means a state in which the jackpot probability of a special symbol is increased, that is, a so-called special symbol probability state (a probability variation state of a special symbol), in other words, a special gaming state (16R jackpot) ) Is a game state that is easy to shift to. On the other hand, a case that is not a “high probability state of a special symbol” is called a “low probability state of a special symbol (normal gaming state)”, which is a state that has a lower probability of jackpot than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol The jackpot probability indicates a normal state (a normal state of a special symbol). The “normal symbol time-short state” (ordinary symbol time-short state) means a game state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol increases and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. On the other hand, when it is not “normal symbol short-time state”, it is called “normal symbol normal state”, which indicates that the normal symbol hit probability is normal, that is, the hit probability is lower than during short-time. . Hereinafter, a period in which the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol after the special symbol jackpot ends is referred to as a probabilistic gaming state. On the other hand, a period in which the special symbol has a low probability state is referred to as a normal gaming state. Furthermore, a period in which the normal symbol is in the short-time state in the normal game state is referred to as a short-time game state. Note that the above-mentioned “ordinary symbol time-short state” is always set in the case of the probability variation state, and in the low-probability state, it is set only in the time-short game state.

  In both cases of “big hit B” and “big hit D”, the game shifts to a special game state (4R big hit) with 4 rounds. In the case of “big hit B”, as the added value after the big hit, the game shifts to the probability change gaming state during the period from the big hit to the next big hit. On the other hand, in the case of “big hit D”, as a value added after the big hit, the short-time gaming state is given for the period from the end of the big hit until the special symbol changes 100 times.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a special symbol jackpot is reached, it is difficult to determine the type of jackpot from the third symbol (special symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to identify whether it is a 16R jackpot or a 4-round jackpot, and the player is interested in whether or not the jackpot game will continue after the fourth round. Can play games. In addition, in the jackpot type of jackpot game, 4 round jackpot and 16 round jackpot are set, and a notification mode indicating that there is a branching point as to whether or not the jackpot game is continued in the fourth round is displayed in the side display. It is configured to be displayed on the device 901. By configuring in this way, in the third symbol display device 81, at the time of jackpot (when the third symbol is stopped and displayed with a glance), the jackpot game is started without notifying the jackpot type, Even if the effect of whether or not the big hit game continues in the fourth round is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to suppress the trouble that the player is confused without knowing what the effect means. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In this embodiment, the jackpot type of 4 rounds and 16 rounds is set, but not limited to this, the jackpot type such as 3 rounds and 7 rounds is set as appropriate, and the player continues the rounds in the jackpot game. You can increase your chances of being interested. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds, but is not limited thereto, and the number of rounds may be larger than 16 rounds. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the specific winning opening 65a is opened once every round, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured such that the switching timing of is difficult to understand. In this case, the third symbol display device 81 does not notify the current number of rounds, and the player plays a game with the expectation that the jackpot game (the game in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened) will last longer. Can be directed. In the case of such a configuration, the side display device 901 can explain that the opening is performed a plurality of times in one round, so that the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

  A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means on the upper right portion (right upper portion in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display by indicating whether or not a special symbol lottery performed in accordance with a ball entering the first ball slot 64 (start winning prize) is being executed or not. As a stopped symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or variation is not executed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the special symbol (the first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times that the ball has entered is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is configured to be suspended up to 4 times, but the maximum number of suspensions is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability states of special symbols) And normal symbols, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, A special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the jackpot D) is shown.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), a special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right A column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays on the first symbol display device 37. Corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki, helmet, etc., almost full front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 8) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the change display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed. For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is “big hit AD”, the variable display in which the main symbols to which “0-9” are added is arranged is performed. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is off, the variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two in the vertical direction, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm for variably displaying the third symbol, and the others. The upper third is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in ascending order or descending order of numbers, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination in this embodiment) is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of spheres that have not been changed (reserved spheres) among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2 And Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the player is more likely to make a big hit than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a bee in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or another character appears. The announcement effect is performed by putting out.

  Here, according to the clothes color and pattern of the character displayed in the small area Ds2, the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the changing special symbol is a big hit is notified. Usually, the color of the clothes is white, and the expectation of jackpot is set higher in the order of blue, red, and camouflage pattern (black and white camouflage pattern). In the case of a camouflage pattern, the player is informed that a variation pattern of either super reach or special reach (see FIGS. 12B to 12D) is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol. Is set as a symbol to be displayed. Further, when a language other than Japanese is set in the language setting, a national flag pattern corresponding to the language is set instead of the camouflage pattern. Thereby, even foreigners can easily recognize that the expectation of jackpot is high. Furthermore, when a character is displayed, the side display device 901 displays a display mode that explains the expected degree of jackpot due to clothes color and pattern as a percentage, so that the player can be notified more easily. it can.

  On the other hand, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 (1st symbol display device 37), the number of entrances is up to 4 times. The number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed per one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball inlet 64 is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of balls to be held is not limited to four times, but three times. You may set below or 5 times (for example, 8 times). Moreover, it replaces with the display of the number of reservation balls in small area Ds1, and the aspect which changes the number of reservation balls by a part in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reservation balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  With reference to Fig.5 (a), the language setting display mode (language setting screen) displayed on the side display device 901 is demonstrated. The side display device 901 is configured by a touch panel type liquid crystal display device, and is configured to be display-controlled by a sub display control device 900 provided in the pachinko machine 10 described later. As one of the display modes displayed on the side display device 901, a language setting display mode (see FIG. 5A) for setting a language used in the pachinko machine 10 is set.

  This language setting display mode is the default when the player presses the language switch icon 901e (see FIG. 5B) that is always displayed on the side display device 901 at normal times and at the initial setting when the power is turned on. Language setting (Japanese in this embodiment) is set to be displayed. As shown in FIG. 5 (a), in the language setting display mode, a description of the language setting method is displayed in the upper part in both Japanese and English, and a representative corresponding to each language is displayed below the description display. A national flag is displayed, a language name is displayed in the language of the country next to it, and then a language name in English is displayed in parentheses. Each language is listed and displayed in parallel in the vertical direction. The language setting display mode is composed of a plurality of pages, and can be displayed by changing the list of types of languages that can be set by switching the pages by the player's operation.

  Here, in the state in which the language setting display mode is displayed, the selection area t (the square display shown in FIG. 5A) indicating that the language is selected by the touch operation is not displayed, and the player does By touching the language display area (the national flag and its country name (Japanese and English display section)), the selection area t is displayed for the touched language. When the language setting icon 901k is touch-operated in a state where the selection area t is not displayed, the language setting is not changed, and the display is switched to the game state.

  At the lower end of the display area of the side display device 901, a return icon 901n for switching the display page of the language setting display mode to the return direction is displayed at the left end, and a next icon 901m for advancing the display page in the next direction is displayed at the right end. . Between the back icon 901n and the next icon 901m, a language setting icon 901k for instructing setting of the selected language is displayed.

  As the language switching operation performed by the player, the display portion corresponding to the language desired by the player (for example, if English is selected, the region t in the square region shown in FIG. 5A) is touched. By operating, the language is selected. In the selected state, as shown in FIG. 5A, a selection display mode (line indicated by t area) displayed by a square line is displayed in the selected language area. When the switching in the selected language is determined, the selected language (English in the example of FIG. 5A) is touched on the language setting icon 901k displayed at the lower end. Is set.

  When the language setting icon is pressed, a normal display mode (specification information of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 5 (b) if in a standby state), a display mode corresponding to a jackpot if a big hit game, etc.) Can be switched to.

  With reference to FIG.5 (b), the spec display mode which shows the spec information of the pachinko machine 10 displayed on the side display device 901 is demonstrated. FIG. 5B is an example of a spec display mode displayed on the side display device 901. This spec display mode is set and displayed by the side display control device 900 when the pachinko machine 10 is in a standby state (a state in which a special symbol variation display is not started for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, 30 seconds)). Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, in the specification display mode, the model name of the pachinko machine 10 (in this embodiment, the pachinko story) is displayed in the model name display area 901a. Below that, the jackpot probability of the pachinko machine 10 (in this embodiment, 1/400 in the normal gaming state (normal) and 1/40 in the probability variation gaming state) is displayed in the jackpot probability display area 901b. Below the jackpot probability display area 901b, the number of balls at the time of jackpot (in this embodiment, 2400 balls for 16R jackpot and 600 balls for 4R jackpot) are displayed in the ball count display area 901c. Below the number-of-balls display area 901c, the jackpot type selection ratio (in this embodiment, jackpot A: 25%, jackpot B: 25%, jackpot C: 25%, jackpot D: 25%) is displayed as a jackpot ratio. It is displayed in the area 901d. A language switching icon display area in which a language switching icon 901e is displayed is set below the jackpot ratio display area 901d.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the standby state (demo state) of the pachinko machine 10, detailed spec information of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed on the side display device 901. Therefore, the player can select the model to be played with reference to the spec information displayed on the side display device 901.

  In the present embodiment, the content displayed in FIG. 5B as the specification information is shown as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Points or the like may be displayed, or the results of the previous day's game (number of difference balls, number of jackpots, etc.) may be displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6A, a normal display mode displayed on the side display device 901 in the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state) will be described. FIG. 6A shows an example of a normal display mode when English is selected in the language setting. In the normal display mode, a schematic diagram of the game board 13 showing a method of playing a game by the player firing a game ball during the normal game state is displayed in the display area 901f. Then, a jackpot probability (in this embodiment, probability (a jackpot probability in Japanese settings): 1/400) when winning in the first entrance 64 during the normal gaming state is displayed. In addition, in the schematic diagram of the game board 13 displayed in the normal display mode, the characters “shot point!” (The launch position in the Japanese setting!) Indicating the position where the player launches the game ball to reach. Is displayed, and the characters “here! (Aim here! In Japanese settings!)” Indicating the position that is advantageous to the player by passing the game ball are displayed. In addition, in the display area 901g at the top of the schematic diagram of the game board 13, the characters “Normal mode” are displayed to notify that the game state is the normal game state. Thereby, the player can play the game in an easily understandable manner during the normal gaming state.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although it comprised so that the position which launches a game ball | bowl could be alert | reported, you may comprise so that not only that but the amount of rotation operations of the launching handle 51 may be alert | reported. Here, in addition to the configuration of the present embodiment, the rotation operation amount may be notified, or only the rotation operation amount may be notified.

  In the present embodiment, the schematic diagram of the game board 13 is simply displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the player touches the schematic diagram, the description of the part corresponding to the touch-operated position is given. May be displayed. For example, when a touch operation is performed on the first entrance 64, a special symbol lottery is performed by entering the first entrance 64, or when a special design is fluctuating. May be configured to display that, for example, a maximum of four stored balls are stored. In addition, in the portion corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 in the schematic diagram, an effect similar to the content displayed on the actual third symbol display device 81 is displayed, or only the third symbol is displayed. Then, it may be configured such that the lottery result of the special symbol can be discriminated while looking at the side display device 901. By configuring in this way, by looking at the side display device 901, you may miss a special symbol lottery result, or you may miss an effect with a low selection rate (an effect that is highly valuable for a player with high expectation of jackpot) Can be suppressed. Furthermore, the jackpot expectation degree of the variation pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot expectation degree of the notice effect, and the like may be displayed in the normal display mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6 (b), a display mode at the time of probability change displayed on the side display device 901 during the probability change gaming state will be described. FIG. 6B is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the time of probability change. In the probability change display mode, a schematic diagram of the game board 13 showing a game method performed by the player firing a game ball is displayed in the display area 901f during the probability change gaming state. In the schematic diagram, the position at which the game ball is launched is displayed as “Shoot point!”. In addition, as a diagram indicating that the normal symbol is in a high probability state (short-time state), it is displayed as “1st step” indicating that the game ball is allowed to pass through the through gate 67, and the electric motor attached to the first entrance 64. A character “2nd step” indicating that the bonus item is released is displayed. As shown in the schematic diagram in this way, during the probability variation game, the player can easily recognize that the electric accessory is released by passing the game ball through the through gate 67. In the schematic diagram, the probability of winning a jackpot (in this embodiment, 1/40) when winning in the first entrance 64 during the probability variation game is displayed as “probability: 1/40”. In the display area 901g, characters of “Special mode” indicating the current gaming state (probability changing gaming state) are displayed. With this configuration, the player can easily recognize the gaming method, the jackpot probability, and the like during the probability variation game.

  Further, in the conventional pachinko machine, when a game is not played in which a new change is not started for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), a demonstration screen such as an explanation of the game is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It was configured as follows. This demo screen is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the player starts playing and a new change is started, and the player who plays the game is not notified of the game method. Further, even if an attempt is made to display a display mode that explains the game method during the game, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the 3rd symbol and effect mode, and there is no space to display. However, in the configuration of the present embodiment, a side display device 901 is provided separately from the 3rd symbol display device 81, and the player is playing the game on the side display device 901, and the gaming method is in the gaming state. (A gaming method that is most advantageous to the player in the current gaming state) is displayed. Therefore, the player can confirm the correct gaming method on the side display device 901 while enjoying the content displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In this embodiment, the side display device 901 is used to display the game method and the like during the probability variation game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of continuations of the probability variation game, the number of balls that can be obtained by the probability variation game, the probability variation, and the like. You may comprise so that the continuation rate of a game may be displayed. In addition, a variation pattern (effect) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the probability change game may be displayed in a portion corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 shown in the schematic diagram. It may be configured to display only the fluctuations. Further, even during the short-time game, the side display device 901 may naturally be configured to display the game method, the current game state, and the jackpot probability in the same manner as the probability variation game state and the normal game state.

  Next, a jackpot display mode displayed on the side display device 901 during the jackpot game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7A is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot display mode when Japanese is set as the language setting. In the jackpot display mode, in the display area 901g, the “big jackpot 3R” indicating the jackpot as the current gaming state and the current number of rounds in the jackpot game is displayed. In the display area 901f, a schematic diagram of the game board 13 is displayed, and a game method during the jackpot game is shown. In the display area 901h, a commentary about the effect during the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed.

  In the schematic diagram of the game board 13 displayed in the display area 901f, the recommended launch position of the game ball is notified (displayed with the letters “launch position”). In addition, a notification is made to notify the player that the game ball is to be won at the specific winning opening 65a (displaying a figure imitating the specific winning opening 65a with the letters “Aim here” displayed. ).

  With this configuration, even a player who plays a game for the first time can easily recognize how to play the jackpot by the jackpot display mode displayed on the side display device 901.

  In the jackpot commentary displayed in the display area 901h, a description of the jackpot effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot is displayed. In this embodiment, when the 3rd symbol which shows the big hit of the special symbol is displayed with the gaze, it becomes the constitution where it is difficult to distinguish the jackpot type from the design and production. The first symbol display device 37 is configured to display the jackpot type, but since it is notified by lighting of the LED, it is difficult to determine the jackpot type. Then, in the fourth round of the jackpot game, the treasure picture is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, thereby informing the player that the jackpot game will continue after the fifth round. Thereby, the player can discriminate | determine that the jackpot classification was 16 round jackpot. In addition, from the first round to the third round, an effect suggesting whether or not a treasure is displayed in the fourth round is displayed.

  Here, it is difficult for a player who has played a game for the first time to understand the meaning of the display mode related to the treasure displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game. In addition, it is difficult to understand the meaning of not reporting the jackpot type at the time of jackpot. However, in this embodiment, as a big hit explanation on the side display device 901, when a treasure is displayed on the main liquid crystal (corresponding to the third symbol display device 81) in the fourth round, the character may indicate that the round continues after the fifth round. Indicated by. Therefore, the player determines whether the jackpot type is 4 round jackpots or 16 round jackpots according to the jackpot display mode displayed on the side display device 901. ) And can be recognized. Further, the contents of the jackpot effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily understood.

  In addition to the configuration of the present embodiment, it is configured to display a lot of other information by displaying the continuation ratio (50% in this embodiment) of the probability variation game in the jackpot display mode or by scroll display. May be. In addition, each information is simply displayed, and the player touches the display area so that detailed information is displayed in a larger display area than the display area where the simple information was displayed. It may be configured.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 7B to 7C, the notice symbol displayed in the display area Ds2 (see FIG. 4B) in the third symbol display device 81 will be described. In the present embodiment, the display area is displayed before the lottery result is notified by the special symbol during the period in which the special symbol (the third symbol) is changed (dynamically displayed) on the third symbol display device 81. A notice design (in this embodiment, a boy character design) is displayed on Ds2 and an effect suggesting a lottery result is executed. Specifically, characters as shown in FIGS. 7B to 7C are displayed, and the jackpot expectation degree is notified by the color and pattern of the clothes of the character.

  FIG. 7B is a diagram showing a notice character in the case of a camouflage clothing pattern having the highest expectation level for jackpot when Japanese is set in the language setting. In this embodiment, although illustration is omitted, blue and red clothes characters are set, and the expectation of jackpot is set higher in the order of blue and red. The camouflage pattern shown in FIG. 7B is set to have a higher expectation than a character set with red clothes.

  FIG. 7C is a diagram showing a character displayed as a pattern of the character with the highest expectation when Danish is set in the language setting. As shown in FIG. 7C, when Danish is set, a Danish national flag pattern is displayed on the character's clothes. This national flag character is displayed in place of the camouflage pattern when Japanese is set, and the camouflage character is configured not to be displayed when a language other than Japanese is set. ing. If a language other than Japanese is set, the national flag pattern character of the country is set as the most expected clothing pattern.

  By configuring in this way, even a foreigner who does not understand the meaning of a camouflage pattern or the like can easily notify the jackpot expectation degree. In the configuration in which the degree of jackpot expectation is notified by the color of clothes, the display mode (in this embodiment, the national flag pattern) in which the pattern of clothes is different is set higher than the character that changed the color of clothes, so the jackpot expectation is higher. It is possible to make the player recognize that the degree of expectation is high.

  In this embodiment, when Japanese is set, the pattern with the highest expectation is the camouflage pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other patterns such as a leopard pattern may be used. You may comprise so that the character of "heat" or "chance" may be displayed. Also, when a foreign language is set, not only the national flag pattern but also other patterns and characters may be displayed.

  Further, the side display device 901 may be configured to display a comment on the expected degree of jackpot corresponding to each notice symbol.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating, by a lighting state, whether or not a normal symbol lottery performed as the ball passes through the second entrance 67, As a stop symbol after the end of the change, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the symbol “◯” and the symbol “x” as the second symbol are alternately lit. Fluctuation display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is activated for a predetermined time. As a result, it is configured such that a ball easily enters the first entrance 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and also lit on the second symbol holding lamp 84. The Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The normal symbol (second symbol) variable display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the sphere at the second entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times as in the case of the 1st entrance 64, but is limited to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more. (For example, 8 times) may be set. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 draws a special symbol, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. The first entrance 64 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 is a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that the big win is stopped after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed. In addition, a stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the game state transitions to a special game state (a big hit of 5 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated five times (five rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening A special gaming state is defined as a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball 65 is opened into the specific winning port 65a. You may make it form.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through an out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  In main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on first symbol display device 37, display setting on second symbol display device 83, and display setting on third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 7, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. For example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used.

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and the first symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first per-type counter C2 used for the selection, the stop-type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-service stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 30). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four reservation areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entrance slot. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball 64. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 30).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. Then, the random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table (see FIG. 11B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot if it matches the random jackpot value set by the first random number table (see FIG. 11B). In addition, the first random number table (see FIG. 11B) is used for a special symbol having a low probability (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a probability that a special symbol is a big hit from the low probability. The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently, and the number of random numbers that are jackpots is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. The first per random number table (see FIG. 11 (b)) for a special symbol with a high probability and the first per random number table (see FIG. 11 (b)) for a special symbol with a low probability It is provided in the ROM 202 of the control device 110.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a. In the first hit random number table 202a, a jackpot determination value at a low probability (in the normal gaming state) and a jackpot determination value at a high probability (in the probability variation gaming state) are set. “0” is set as the determination value at the low probability, and “0 to 29” is set as the determination value at the high probability. Here, the determination value at the time of high probability includes “0” that is the determination value at the time of low probability, and is set as a determination value that is a big hit at both low probability and high probability. Thus, the pre-reading process (a process of determining whether or not the big hit is made when winning the first entrance) is facilitated.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first per-random number counter C1, there is one random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random value “0” is the first per-random number table ( (See FIG. 11B). In this way, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 1 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/400”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 10 random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the value “0-9” is the first random number table for the high probability (FIG. 11B). Stored in the reference). Thus, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 10 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/40”.

  In the present embodiment, the random number value that is a big hit stored in the first per-random number table for low probability (see FIG. 11B) and the first per-random number table for high probability (FIG. 11). (B) (see (b)), the random value stored in the jackpot is a duplicate value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and each jackpot random value may be set so as not to be a duplicate value. . Here, if there is a value that is always used as a jackpot random value regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random value may be input from the outside, and the jackpot may be easily illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in this embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a special symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol), the random number value that is a jackpot is changed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict a random value that is a big hit of a special symbol, and thus it is possible to suppress fraud.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. And as shown in FIG.11 (c), the judgment value is set corresponding to each big hit type by the 1st hit type selection table 202b. In the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random number value is “0 to 24” is “big hit A”. The jackpot type when the value is “25 to 49” is “Big Jack B”, the jackpot type when the value is “50 to 74” is “Big Jack C”, and the value is “75”. The jackpot type in the case of “˜99” is “jackpot D”.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment determines four types of hit types (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, big hit D) based on the random number value indicated by the first hit type counter C2. It is configured. The random value for determining the special symbol jackpot type from the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2 is set by a special symbol jackpot type table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of release displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the reach has occurred, the final stop symbol stops other than the reach symbol. ”(For example, in the range of 90 to 99) and“ stop completely ”(for example, in the range of 0 to 89) that does not generate reach are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a random value range set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a table for a high-probability time with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and “completely off” is easily selected. In the low probability state, the random value range corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is 0 to 79 and the probability is low so as to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64. Table is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. The The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 30) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A fluctuation pattern table (see FIGS. 12B to 12D) storing random number values for determining one fluctuation time of symbol fluctuations from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the main controller 110. The ROM 202 is provided.

  Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 12A, the variation pattern table 202d includes a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 12B) and a release (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 12C). At least a deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 12D) is set. Although not shown in the drawing, a variation pattern table in the short-time gaming state is set in addition to this.

  The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. As the jackpot variation pattern, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is set as the determination value for each variation pattern.

  Specifically, “0-50” for the fluctuation patterns of various normal reach (30 seconds), “51-179” for the fluctuation patterns of various super reach (60 seconds), various special reach (90 seconds). ) Is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the MPU 201 wins the variation pattern in which a determination value corresponding to the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is set. Select from the change pattern table 202d1 for use.

  FIG. 12C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (fluctuation time) of the fluctuation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place is set. If the special symbol lottery result is out of place, as described above, whether the stop type is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (reach common) from the stop type selection table (not shown) It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete outage is set, and if in the range of “80 to 99”, outlier reach is set.

  Here, when the variation pattern type is a complete deviation, a short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time and a long deviation (10 seconds) with a long fluctuation time are set. “0 to 98” is set as the judgment value for the short deviation (7 seconds), and “99 to 198” is set as the judgment value for the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the long deviation (10 seconds).

  For outreach, “0 to 149” for various types of normal reach (30 seconds) and “150 to 197” for various types of superreach (60 seconds). For various types (90 seconds), “198” is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1.

  As described above, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of play in the normal gaming state, and obtains it from the out (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2. Based on the value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1, a fluctuation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern selection table 202d2.

  FIG. 12C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern selection table 202d3. This deviation (probability change) variation pattern selection table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol to be removed when the game state is a probability variation game state. This deviation (probable variation) variation pattern selection table 202d3 is different in that the set value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is different from the aforementioned variation (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2.

  As described above, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” based on the stop type selection table (not shown), complete losing is determined. , The outreach reach is determined in the range of “90 to 99”.

  In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is higher than the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching when the player is out of play is set lower. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the deviation fluctuation time from becoming longer at the time of probability change and the period until the big hit from being prolonged. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game is bored during the probability-changing game state where it is easy to make a big hit and the player feels bored.

  In addition, about the kind of fluctuation pattern, you may comprise so that several types may be set in addition to what was mentioned above.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. And is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  The random number value that is a normal symbol is set by the second random number table (see FIG. 11D) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is When the value of the random number that is the winning set by the second winning random number table (see FIG. 11D) matches, it is determined that the normal symbol is won. This second random number table (see FIG. 11 (d)) is for the probability of a normal symbol having a low probability (period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state) and the probability of being a normal symbol hit from that low probability. It is divided into two types, one for a high high probability (period in which the normal symbol is in a short time state), and the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  Here, the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202c. In the second random number table 202c, as shown in FIG. 11 (d), there are 24 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the range is “5-28”. . These random number values are stored in the second per random number table (see FIG. 11D) for low probability. Thus, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24 among the total number of random number values, and therefore the probability of jacking a special symbol is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol is displayed in the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × one time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11 (d), there are 200 random numbers that are big hits of the normal symbol when the normal symbol has a high probability, and the range is “5-204”. These random number values are stored in a second random number table (see FIG. 11D) for high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol is displayed in the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened “for 1 second × 2 times”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time becomes very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared to the normal symbol having a low probability, and further, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64. Note that a table (not shown) storing random number values for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened only “one second × two times” when the normal symbol is hit. What is necessary is just to set time and frequency | count arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 30).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 9, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 30), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 25) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 28) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Next, the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 10, in the RAM 203, a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, and a probability change flag 203e. A time-short / medium counter 203f, a pre-reading probability changing counter 203g, and a counter buffer 203h.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Each of these areas has a first per-random number counter C1. Each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (1 area to reserved 4th area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special control lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the holding first area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a are shifted to the execution area. Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) where winning data is stored.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, when a ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the start winning, a big hit lottery of the original special symbol Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the obtained values of the respective counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the start prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3). The prediction is described as prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. Note that the various types of information correspond to success / failure, stop type, variation pattern, and the like.

  When the prefetching is completed, a winning information command including various types of information (presence / absence, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the prefetching is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the success / failure type, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information for the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. It is stored in 223a.

  Similarly to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding). Among the vacant areas of the (fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as with the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for a normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the holding first area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, and as in the case of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the prizes stored in the other reserved areas are stored. A shift process is performed in which data is packed into a reserved area with an area number smaller by one. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variation display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 on the basis of the entrance to the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. This special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to an initial value of zero, and every time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value 4 is increased to 1. They are added (see S404 in FIG. 25). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 every time the special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 23).

  The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display holdings in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 23 and S405 in FIG. 25). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 uses the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed, and the variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual number of held balls in the variable display held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated from, the deviation can be corrected by the next number of reserved balls command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d displays the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable symbol display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67. It is a counter that counts up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero. Each time the ball passes through the second entrance 67 and the number of held balls for variable display increases, 1 is added to the maximum value of 4. (See S604 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time a variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S505 in FIG. 26).

  If the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, a random number per second The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S605 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4 when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. Not performed (S603 in FIG. 27: No).

  The probability variation flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state (a special symbol high probability state). If the type of jackpot executed is jackpot A or jackpot B at the timing when the jackpot game ends (S1011: Yes in FIG. 31), it is set to ON in the processing of S1012 in FIG. In the state where the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, the flag is set to OFF. In addition, when the power is cut off, it is backed up, and when the power is turned on again, the state before the power is turned off is restored.

  The hour / minute counter 203f is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time / short state. If the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time / short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. At this time, the initial value of the short / medium counter 203f is set to zero, and a special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, and a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set each time it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. Is done. That is, when the special symbol is a big hit, a value corresponding to the big hit type is newly set regardless of the value of the hour / middle counter 203f.

  Specifically, if it is determined that the jackpot type is “jackpot C” or “jackpot D”, the hour / minute counter 203f is set to 100 (S1014 in FIG. 31). Thereafter, 1 is subtracted every time the special symbol variation effect is finished until the value of the hour / short counter 203f becomes 0 (S215 in FIG. 23).

  When a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the hour / medium counter 203f is referred to. If the value is 1 or more, the second random number table for high probability (see FIG. 11D) On the other hand, when the normal symbol lottery 203f is 0, the normal symbol lottery is performed on the basis of the second random number table (see FIG. 11D) for the low probability. A lottery is performed (see S510 and S511 in FIG. 26).

  The pre-reading probability changing flag 203g is used when the pachinko machine 10 prefetches the lottery result of the special symbol based on the winning data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) acquired according to the start winning. Whether the winning data should be analyzed as being in a probable state (high probability state of special symbol), or the winning data is analyzed as if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of special symbol (low probability state of special symbol) It is a flag that indicates what should be done.

  When the pre-reading probability changing flag 203g is on, the winning data is analyzed assuming that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability changing state, and the lottery result of the special symbol is prefetched. On the other hand, when the pre-reading probability changing flag 203g is off, the winning data is analyzed assuming that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, and the lottery result of the special symbol is pre-read.

  The counter buffer 203h is a buffer used when the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes control processing.

  The other memory area 203z is an area in which various flags and counters necessary for controlling the pachinko machine 10 are stored.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, and the like) 227, and fluctuating effects (variation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a continuous notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach is performed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  As shown in FIG. 13A, the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern table 222a and a sound language storage area 222b. Further, as shown in FIG. 13B, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball counter 223b, a variation start flag 223c, and a stop type selection flag 223d. At least a power-off process flag 223e, a speech language storage area 223f, and a selected language flag 223g are provided.

  The fluctuation pattern table 222a is a data table for selecting more detailed fluctuation pattern contents based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main controller 110. Specifically, a plurality of types of variation patterns are set for each of the rough types such as normal reach, and one variation pattern is set based on a predetermined selection lottery executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The content is determined.

  The audio language storage area 222b stores audio data output from the audio output device 226. In the speech language storage area 222b, each speech corresponding to each language that can be set by the pachinko machine 10 is set. Specifically, voices in the same language are stored at consecutive addresses. All speech data corresponding to one language is stored in a continuous address area, and speech data corresponding to the next language is set after the final address. The order in which audio data is stored is the same for each language. That is, audio data indicating the same contents only in different languages is stored at addresses obtained by adding the same addresses from the start address where audio in each language is stored.

  For example, for each piece of audio data set corresponding to the variation pattern, differential address data of the audio data to be output for each variation pattern and its output timing are set. The MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 outputs, as output data, voice data stored at an address obtained by adding the address indicated by the differential address data from the head address in the voice language storage area 222b corresponding to the language indicated by the selected language flag 223f. Set. Thereby, even if it is the structure which can switch a some language, the audio | voice of the language which respond | corresponds easily can be output only by a change of a head address.

  In this embodiment, the voice data selection method is as described above. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a command corresponding to each language is set, and voice data in a corresponding language is selected based on the command. It may be. Further, the audio data may be configured to be stored and set in a dedicated ROM.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize From the above, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various kinds of information (whether it is successful, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). Is done. In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), like the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. Thus, the counter is a counter that counts up to four times the number of balls to be held (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effects held in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of held balls by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of held balls for variation display is added by entering the first entrance 64, or in the main controller 110, variation display in a special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, Stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223b (see S1309 in FIG. 34). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and also stores the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b after the storage. In order to notify the display controller 114 of this value, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display controller 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Accordingly, the number of reserved ball numbers displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The variation start flag 223c is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1302 in FIG. 34), and is turned off when setting of variation display in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S1702 in FIG. 33). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1202) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1306 in FIG. 34), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1407 in FIG. 35). When the stop type selection flag 223d is set to ON, processing for stopping the special symbol is executed.

  The power-off processing flag 223e is a flag that is turned on when a power-off occurs, and is a flag that is set off in the processing of S1217 after the power-off processing (S1216 in FIG. 33) is executed. is there. That is, the power-off processing flag is a flag indicating that the power-off processing (S1216 in FIG. 33) that is executed when the power-off occurs is being executed. At the next power-on, by determining whether the power-off processing flag 223e is on (S1102 in FIG. 32), the power is completely turned off before the power-off processing (S1216 in FIG. 33) is completed. It can be determined whether or not it has occurred.

  The selected language flag 223f is a flag indicating a language used in the pachinko machine 10. As the selected language flag 223f, a dedicated flag is set corresponding to each language used in the pachinko machine 10, and it is possible to determine which language is set in the pachinko machine 10 by the selected language flag 223f. When the selected language flag 223f receives a language setting command from the sub display control device 900, the flag corresponding to the language indicated by the received command is set to ON (S1319 in FIG. 34). The MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 discriminates the language selected based on the selected language flag 223f for the sound language output from the sound output device 226 when executing the variation pattern and various processes, and outputs the determined language. The voice data is set so that the voice language of the corresponding language is selected and output from the voice language storage area 222b stored in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

  The other memory area 223z is an area in which counters, flags, data, and the like necessary for each control executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are stored.

  In addition, the RAM 223 includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 34) of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area, and the command determination process The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The sub display control device 900 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the side display device 901. The command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the information input from the side display device 901, the setting switch 301, the GPS 302, the camera 303, Based on information input from the human sensor 304, display control of the side display device 901 is executed. Further, a process of outputting a command indicating information on the set language or the like to the sound lamp control device 113 is also executed. Details of the sub-display control apparatus 900 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 28). Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

<Electric Configuration of Display Control Device 114>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other A process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after canceling the system reset in the boot program are obtained from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it to the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” and then the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a (see FIG. 15), the instruction pointer 231a is programmed. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address in the storage area 233a. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, an initialization process (see FIG. 36 (FIG. 36B)) that is executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program (see S1901 in FIG. 36B) stored in the program storage area 233a. The head address of the program corresponding to S) in step b) is set.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  In this embodiment, a display language data storage area 234d2 and a display announcement data storage area 234d3 are set in the NOR ROM 234d of the character ROM 234, respectively. In the display language data storage area 234d2, character data (comment display, game description, character notice, etc.) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored in a settable language. Specifically, each character data is set for each address in the order of consecutive addresses for one language, and after each character data for one language, each character data corresponding to the next language is consecutive for each address. Is set. The contents of the character data set for each language are the same.

  Specifically, it is assumed that character data “good morning” is stored at the head address where Japanese character data is stored, and character data “goodbye” is stored at the next address. Thus, one or a plurality of addresses are designated and stored for each character data group to be displayed. Then, the character data “Good mooring” is stored at the head address where the English character data is stored, and the character data “Good bye” is stored at the next address. With this configuration, even if the language is switched, it is correct by changing the start address of the language and selecting the character data based on the same differential address (address addition data) as in other languages. Character data can be selected. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control processing load when switching languages.

  All character data stored in the display language data storage area 234d2 is transferred to the resident image transfer setting process (FIG. 48A, S2205) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 (to be described later). The data is transferred to the display language data storage area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 by the processing of S3505 in FIG. 48B and S3402. In the case of transfer, a similar address is designated and transferred to the display language data storage area 235f. As a result, it is possible to quickly display characters in the language set after the power is turned on, and it is possible to make the player perform the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In this embodiment, the character data in the display language data storage area 234d2 is stored in the NOR ROM 234d. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the character data may be stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the control load at the initial startup. In this embodiment, all language data is transferred, but only a representative language (a part of the stored language) is transferred, and the language is not transferred. It is also possible to configure so that the transfer time is shortened when the value is set. In addition, when each language is set so that only the character data part necessary for the initial stage (language switching setting etc.) is transferred at the minimum, language switching is executed, all the character data of that language May be configured to forward.

  In the display notice data storage area 234d3, character notice data corresponding to each language is stored for the character notice as shown in FIGS. With regard to the respective notice data stored in the display notice data storage area 234d3, the resident image transfer setting process (FIG. 48 (a), S2205) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 (to be described later) ( The data is transferred to the display notice data storage area 235g of the resident video RAM 235 by the processing of S3506 in FIG. 48B and S3402).

  Note that, similarly to the character data stored in the display language data storage area 234d2, it may be stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Alternatively, only a part of the notice data may be transferred, and the notice data may be transferred based on language switching. Further, it may be configured such that the language is switched when language switching is performed without being transferred at the time of initial setting.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 21) to be described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c to be described later The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 38B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 includes a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a, and the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is kept overwritten without being overwritten during power-on, and the main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, and the character symbol area when the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. Further, in the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected. In this case, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image that displays the lottery result performed in the main controller 110 by the variation effect is stored.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1903 and S1904 in FIG. 36B).

  Here, a power-on variation image (not shown) will be described. The power-on image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is turned on. It is explanatory drawing to do.

  The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image in the third symbol display device. 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 that is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the power-on main image. On the display screen of, the fluctuation image at power-on of the “○” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen and the fluctuation image at power-on of the “×” symbol at the same position as the “○” symbol. It is displayed repeatedly alternately. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. Judgment result, if “special symbol jackpot” is displayed, “○” image is displayed for a certain period of time after stopping the changing effect, and if it is “out of special symbol”, “×” image is stopped for changing effect It will be displayed for a certain period later.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the fluctuation image area at the time of power-on The power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and the “◯” image and the “×” image are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance sphere 64 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 14, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the third symbol area 235d, as main symbols not numbered “0” to “9”, a main symbol consisting of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a planer, a furoshiki, and a helmet is imitated. The image data corresponding to the main symbol composed of the attached symbol is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads it into the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data resident in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The display language data storage area 235f is a storage area in which character data corresponding to each language displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored. As described above, in this display language data storage area 235f, an address area is set for each language, and character data indicating the same contents in the same order for each language is stored in the address area. Therefore, even when language switching is performed, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 only sets a head address corresponding to the language, and uses differential address data (additional address data) similar to other languages. Character data showing similar contents can be selected.

  The display notice data storage area 235g is a storage area in which display data of the character notice symbols as shown in FIGS. 7B to 7C stored in the display notice data storage area 234d3 is transferred and stored for each language. It is.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list (to be described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233j, a drawing target buffer flag 233k, and a language setting flag 233m.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are in accordance with a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. Display data tables corresponding to ending effects and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If the jackpot is C or jackpot D, the stop symbol indicating the jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player cannot recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and according to the type of the sprite, the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the translucency Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back surface type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (any one of the “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”), or the back surface A to C. Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is displayed.

  When the MPU 231 specifies that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified as time elapses. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In this embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  “0000H”, which is the head address of the display data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 14) contains the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The contents of the image to be drawn are specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 21) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 20 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 20).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 20, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 21) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 20, when the pointer 233 f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the above power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main processing (see FIG. 36B) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S1905 in FIG. 36B). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S3807 in FIG. 48B).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2201 in FIG. 38B). When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S2208 in FIG. 38B) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 38B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 38 (b) S2209) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 39 to 44) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 45 to 46) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S3401 in FIG. 48A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 48B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 49) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 21), which will be described later, describing the contents of the image drawing instruction for is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 21) describing the drawing instruction content is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. (That is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 21), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 38B). )), The pointer update process (see S3305 in FIG. 47) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list to be described later (See FIG. 21) is created, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 21, the back image used for the image of one frame, the third design (symbol 1, design 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 corresponds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of characters (character 1, character 2,..., Retained ball number design 1, retained ball number design 2,..., Error design).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. 38B). Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3107 in FIG. 45). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by an initial setting process (see S1902 in FIG. 36B) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3613 in FIG. 49). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3614 in FIG. 49). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3702 in FIG. 50).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233k, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 38B) is executed (see S3702 in FIG. 50).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The language setting flag 233m is a flag for storing the language indicated by the language setting command output from the sub display control apparatus 900. When the language is set on the language setting screen or the language used in the pachinko machine 10 is set by the initial setting, the sub display control device 900 sends a language setting command indicating the language to the display control device 114. Output. The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 that receives this language setting command switches the language displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the notice display mode, etc. to the display mode that matches the language and displays it. As described above, the start address of the display language data storage area 235f is set based on the language set in the language setting flag 233m, and the character data to be displayed is selected according to the difference address set in the display data table. To do. Therefore, the display control device 114 can switch the language display only by changing the head address, and the display process can be simplified.

<Electric Configuration of Sub Display Control Device 900>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 16 to 18, an electrical configuration of the sub-display control apparatus 900 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the sub-display control device 900. The sub display control device 900 includes an MPU 261, a work RAM 263, a character ROM 264, a resident video RAM 265, a normal video RAM 266, an image controller 267, an input / output port 268, an input / output port 269, and a bus line 270. , 271.

  The input side of the input / output port 268 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp controller 113, and the output side of the input / output port 268 is connected to the MPU 261, work RAM 263, character ROM 264, and image controller 267 via the bus line 270. ing. A resident video RAM 265 and a normal video RAM 266 are connected to the image controller 267, and an input / output port 269 is connected via a bus line 271. A side display device 901 is connected to the output side of the input / output port 269. The input / output port 268 also has a setting switch 301 for setting whether or not to perform language setting based on position information of the GPS 302, and position data for determining the location data of the place where the pachinko machine 10 is installed. A GPS 302, a camera 303 for acquiring image data of the player, a human sensor 304 for determining whether or not there is a player in front of the pachinko machine 10, and for detecting the launch of a game ball A launch sensor 305 is connected to each.

  Here, the MPU 261, the work RAM 263, the character ROM 264, the resident video RAM 265, the normal video RAM 266, the image controller 267, the input / output port 268, the input / output port 269, and the bus of the sub display control device 900 are displayed. The lines 270 and 271 are the same as those already described for the display control device 114, and the set data, the stored data, and the like are different, so the differences will be described.

  The NAND flash memory 264a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 264, and stores most of a control program executed by the MPU 261 and fixed value data for driving the side display device 901. When the language setting is executed based on the second program storage area 264a1 and the position data of the GPS 302, at least a language selection table 264a2 in which the position data and the corresponding language are set is provided.

  The resident video RAM 265 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 264 is maintained without being overwritten when the power is turned on, the power-on image area 265a, the error message image area 265b, the display language data. A storage area 265c is provided at least.

  The power-on main image area 265a displays a power-on image ("Loading Now" displayed on the side display device 901 from when the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 265. This is an area for storing data corresponding to “characters”.

  The error message image area 265 b is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10.

  The display language data storage area 265c is a storage area in which character data corresponding to each language displayed on the side display device 901 is stored. As described above, in this display language data storage area 265c, an address area is set for each language, and character data indicating the same contents in the same order for each language is stored in the address area. Therefore, the MPU 261 of the sub-display control device 900 also sets the top address corresponding to the language even when language switching is performed, and uses the same addition data (difference data) as in other languages. Can be selected.

  The work RAM 263 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 264 and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 261. Composed. As shown in FIG. 17, the work RAM 263 includes a program storage area 263a, a data table storage area 263b, a simple image display flag 263c, a display data table buffer 263d, a transfer data table buffer 263e, a pointer 263f, a drawing list area 263g, a time count. A counter 263h, a stored image data determination flag 263i, and a drawing target buffer flag 263j are included. Since the contents are the same as those of the display control device 114, detailed description thereof is omitted. The work RAM 263 (see FIG. 17) further includes a specification information storage area 263k, a state storage area 263m, a state flag 263n, a display language setting flag 263p, a language setting flag 263r, and a display language setting value storage area 263s. .

  The specification information storage area 263k stores the specification information of the pachinko machine 10 indicated by the sub-display specification information command output from the sound lamp control device 113. As the specification information, information notified from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 such as a jackpot probability and the number of winning balls is set.

  The state storage area 263m is a storage area for storing a gaming state (a normal gaming state, a probability variation gaming state, a short-time gaming state, a jackpot start, a jackpot end, during a demonstration). In the state storage area 263m, a game state is set by determining each command notified from the sound lamp control device 113.

  The state flag 263n is a flag indicating that it is timing to display the display mode corresponding to the gaming state on the side display device 900. This state flag 263n is set to ON when the gaming state is shifted or when switching to a display mode corresponding to the gaming state from the language setting screen (see FIG. 5A). Note that the flag is set to OFF in the initial setting such as when the power is turned on.

  The display language setting flag 263p is a flag indicating a set language. The display language setting flag 263p is composed of 16 bits, and a setting value (value) is set in advance corresponding to each language. When the language is switched, the display language setting flag 263p is set to a setting value corresponding to the language. The MPU 261 of the sub display control device 900 is configured to set the head address of the display language data storage area 265c corresponding to the language set in the display language setting flag 263p. The character data is set by adding the difference address of the character data set in the sub display data table set from the set head address. With this configuration, even when language switching is performed, a corresponding language can be displayed using the same sub display data table.

  The language setting flag 263r is a flag indicating that the language setting screen is displayed and the language setting is performed. When the language setting flag 263r is set to ON, a language setting screen (see FIG. 5A) is displayed on the side display device 901, and language switching is processed to be executable.

  The display language setting value storage area 263s is information on the language (state before switching is confirmed) selected by the player's touch operation when the language setting screen (see FIG. 5A) is displayed. Is an area in which is stored. Thereby, the language selected by the player on the language setting screen (FIG. 5A) can be determined. Note that language information is not set in the initial state when the power is turned on. Thereby, when the language setting screen (FIG. 5A) is displayed and the language setting icon 901k (see FIG. 5A) is pressed without selecting any language, the language being set is displayed. It is set not to be switched. Therefore, even when the player accidentally presses the language switching icon 901e, the player can return from the language setting screen (see FIG. 5A) without switching the language.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 18, the sub display data table has six types of sub display data tables A to F corresponding to each gaming state and a sub corresponding to the language setting screen (see FIG. 5A). Display data table is set. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the sub display data table A is set, and the display mode shown in FIG. 5A is displayed on the side display device 901. When the MPU 261 sets the sub display data table A, the display language is the head of the character data differential address set in the sub display data table (equivalent to FIG. 19) set by the display language setting flag 263p. By setting the character data added to the address, the characters in the corresponding language are displayed.

  Here, in the sub display data table A set in the normal gaming state, the spec information in the normal gaming state (the lottery probability, the entrance to be targeted, the current gaming state, etc.) is displayed, and the game in the normal gaming state The method is explained. Furthermore, the display imitating the game board 13 is displayed, and the effect similar to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or only the third symbol is displayed at a position imitating the third symbol display device 81.

  The sub display data table B is set corresponding to the probability variation gaming state. In the sub display data table B, spec information, a gaming method, a current gaming state, and the like in the probability variation gaming state as shown in FIG. 6B are displayed.

  A sub display data table C is set corresponding to the short-time gaming state. In the sub display data table C, spec information, a gaming method, and a current gaming state in the short-time gaming state are displayed.

  The sub display data table D is set corresponding to the gaming state during the big hit (start of the big hit). In the sub display data table D, the jackpot game method as shown in FIG. 7B, the explanation of the jackpot effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the current number of rounds, and the like are displayed.

  The sub display data table E is set corresponding to the gaming state at the time of the big hit. In the sub display data table E, a display mode indicating the end of the jackpot is displayed. Here, specifically, a notification is displayed so as to stop the launch of the game ball and wait for a while. At the end of the jackpot, it may be configured to notify the number of winning balls, the gaming state after the jackpot game, and the like.

  A sub display data table F is set corresponding to the demo state. In the sub display data table F, spec information of the pachinko machine 10 as shown in FIG. 5B, a demonstration display introducing the contents of the pachinko machine 10, and the like are displayed.

  In the sub display data table corresponding to the language setting screen (FIG. 5A), the sub display data table is set corresponding to the plurality of pages. In the sub display data table, the language setting display mode as shown in FIG. 5A is displayed on the side display device 901.

  The contents of the sub display data table are the same as the display data table of the display control device 114 (see FIG. 19). Each sub display data table is stored in the data table storage area 263b.

  Further, the transfer data table and the drawing list used in the sub display control device 900 are also the same as those of the display control device 114, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The side display device 901 is a liquid crystal display device having a touch panel. When the touch panel is touched, the coordinate data is notified to the sub display control device 900.

  The setting switch 301 is a slide type switch provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 3). This setting switch 301 is set to ON or OFF. When set to ON, language setting by the GPS 302 is not executed, and when the power is turned on, the language setting screen is automatically set after being always set in Japanese. Therefore, the display is set on the side display device 901.

  The GPS 302 is a sensor that can acquire position information (latitude, longitude). This GPS 302 is the same as that mainly used for car navigation etc., and is well known. Based on the position data acquired from the GPS 302, a process for determining the installation location and setting the corresponding language is executed.

  The camera 303 is installed on the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The camera 303 is arranged so as to be able to photograph the upper body of the player who is in front of the pachinko machine 10. The camera 303 is composed of a CCD camera and is connected so as to be able to output captured image data to the sub-display control device 900.

  The human sensor 304 is installed on the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The human sensor 304 is a sensor for determining whether or not there is a player on the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and determines the movement of a person using infrared rays. When a person's movement is discriminated, it is detected that there is a person.

  The launch sensor 305 detects the launch of a game ball, and is composed of a gate-type magnetic sensor. It is provided in the exit part (refer FIG. 2) of a launch rail, and is set to ON when a game ball passes.

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When it reaches 299, 99, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). The special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In the special symbol variation process (S104), first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205) and is changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 30) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, a special symbol variation start process for starting variation display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. Is not passed (S209: No), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S210), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S211). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if the special symbol is a big hit, the value depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C or jackpot D is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on, and when the jackpot C is reached. The red LED and the blue LED are turned on. When the jackpot D is reached, the red LED, the blue LED, and the green LED are turned on. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the processing of S211 is finished, the special symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S212). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S212: Yes), a special symbol jackpot start is set (S213), and the process is terminated. When the special symbol jackpot start is set by the processing of S213, the jackpot effect starts in the third symbol display device 81 when the jackpot control processing (S904) of the main processing (see FIG. 30) is executed. Is done.

  In the process of S212, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S212: No), it is determined whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S214), and the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1. If it is above (S214: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the hour / minute counter 203f (S215), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / middle counter 203f is 0 (S214: No), the process of S215 is skipped and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 23, S104) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, a lottery (decision of success / failure) of “special symbol jackpot” or “exclusion of special symbol” is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are selected. It is a process for determining the production pattern (fluctuation production pattern) of the fluctuation production performed in step S2.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired. (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203e of the RAM 203 is on (S302). The probability variation flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state. If the probability variation flag 203e is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol certain variation state. If the flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol normal state.

  When the probability variation flag 203e is on (S302: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol certain variation state, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S301 and the first value for the high probability time are displayed. Based on the per random number table 202a, a lottery result indicating whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is obtained (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with 30 random numbers stored in the first random number table 202a for high probability one by one. As described above, as the random value that is a big hit of the special symbol, 30 values of “0 to 29” are set, and the value of the first random number counter C1 coincides with the random number value that hits them. When it does, it determines with it being a jackpot of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when the probability variation flag 203e is off (S302: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 Based on the first per-random number table 202a for low probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the three random number values stored in the first random number table for low probability. Three random numbers “0 to 2” are set as special symbol jackpots, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value that wins the special symbol, It is determined that the symbol is a big hit. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305). If it is determined that the special symbol is a big jackpot (S305: Yes), Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode for the big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and the big hits (big wins) of the four types of special symbols are compared. A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D) are determined for the jackpot type. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 24”, it is determined that the jackpot A (16R jackpot, the special symbol will change until the next jackpot), and “25 to 49”. If it is within the range, it is determined that the jackpot B (4R jackpot, special symbol until the next jackpot), if it is in the range of "50-74", jackpot C (16R jackpot, up to 100 variations of the special symbol) If it is in the range of “74-99”, it is determined that the jackpot D (4R jackpot, the time is up to 100 fluctuations of the special symbol) (see FIG. 11C).

  In the process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, big hit D). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (hit A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D) is set as the stop type.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the big hit symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. Note that the relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 12B) and the out (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 in FIG. 12 (see FIG. 12C). ), And is defined in advance by the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 12D).

  For example, variation patterns for detachment are defined as “displacement (for a long time)”, “detachment (for a short time)”, “reason normal reach”, “reason superreach”, and “reason special reach”. As a variation pattern of jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D common, various “normal reach”, various “super reach”, and various “special reach” are defined.

  In the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, whether it is out of reach or complete out is set.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability changing state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, complete outage is set, and if in the range of “90 to 99”, outlier reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete outage is set, and if in the range of “80 to 99”, outlier reach is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. To decide.

  When the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S901 of the main process (FIG. 30). The The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 22), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64, and there is a start winning. This is a process for holding a value indicated by various random number counters and prefetching a lottery result in a special symbol from the values indicated by the various random number counters held.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning slot 64 (start winning prize) (S401). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  And, there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is less than 4. If not (S403: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the number of special symbol reservation balls The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 30) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. Is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, lottery of special symbols is performed based on the values of the first random number counter C1, the first per category counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the empty reserved area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a in the process of S406. Is predicted (whether it is a win or not), its stop type (a big hit type in the case of a big win), and its fluctuation pattern (S407).

  Here, if the pre-reading probability changing flag 203g is on, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined by the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the process of S406 and the first per-random number table for high probability. It is determined by comparing each of 30 random values (winning values) stored in 202a. As described above, as the random value that is a big hit of the special symbol, 30 values of “0 to 29” are set, and the value of the first random number counter C1 coincides with the random number value that hits them. When it does, it determines with it being a jackpot of a special symbol (refer FIG.11 (b)).

  On the other hand, if the pre-reading probability changing flag 203g is off, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined by the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the process of S406 and the first per-random number table 202a for low probability. Is determined by comparing one by one with the three random values (winning values) stored in. As described above, three random numbers of “0 to 2” are set as special symbol jackpots, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value that hits them. When it does, it determines with it being a jackpot of a special symbol (refer FIG.11 (b)).

  If it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the process of S406 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type table, Among the four types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 24”, it is determined that the jackpot A (16R jackpot, the special symbol will change until the next jackpot), and “25 to 49”. If it is within the range, it is determined that the jackpot B (4R jackpot, special symbol until the next jackpot), if it is in the range of "50-74", jackpot C (16R jackpot, up to 100 variations of the special symbol) If it is in the range of “74-99”, it is determined that the jackpot D (4R jackpot, the time is up to 100 fluctuations of the special symbol) (see FIG. 11C).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is out, the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the process of S406 is the outreach reach. It is determined whether it is present or not completely. Here, if the pre-reading probability changing flag 203g is on, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the process of S406 is compared with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. The stop type is determined. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, it is determined that the stop is complete, and if it is in the range of “90 to 99”, it is determined that the reach is out of reach. On the other hand, if the pre-reading probability changing flag 203g is off, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, and the stop type is determined. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, it is determined that the vehicle is completely out of range, and if it is in the range of “80 to 99”, it is determined that it is out of reach.

  Next, the variation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. The variation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is selected from the variation pattern table stored in the ROM 202 according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot). . In the variation pattern table, for example, as a variation pattern for detachment, various types of “out (for long time)”, “out (for short time)”, “out normal reach”, “out super reach”, “out special reach” "Variable patterns of jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D shared," common reach "shared, various" super reach "shared," special reach "shared, As a variation pattern of common hit and miss, various types of “normal reach” for common use, “super reach” for common use, and “special reach” for common use are defined. Then, a variation pattern is selected from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern table according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

  If the process of S407 predicts whether the lottery is a special symbol, a stop type (a jackpot type in the case of jackpot), and a variation pattern, then the predicted lottery is predicted, the predicted stop type, A winning information command including the predicted variation pattern is set (S408).

  The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 30) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. When receiving the winning information command, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the success / failure, stop type, and variation pattern from the winning information command, and stores these information as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a. Then, it is determined whether or not to start displaying the continuous notice effect.

  After the winning information command is set by the process of S408, it is determined whether or not the winning of the lottery predicted by the process of S407 is a probable big hit of the special symbol (S409). If the lottery result predicted in the process of S407 is a special symbol probable big hit (S409: Yes), the pre-reading probable changing flag 203g is set to ON (S410), this process is terminated, and the timer interrupt process Return to. On the other hand, if the lottery result predicted in the process of S407 is not a probable big hit of the special symbol (S409: No), it is determined whether the lottery result predicted in the process of S407 is a special symbol time or big hit (S411), If the lottery result predicted in the processing of S407 is a special symbol time and bonus (S411: Yes), the pre-reading probability changing flag 203g is set to OFF (S412), this processing ends, and the processing returns to the timer interruption processing. . On the other hand, if the lottery result predicted in the process of S407 is not a special symbol time and bonus (S411: No), the process of S412 is skipped and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first entrance 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) (S501). As a normal symbol (second symbol) hitting, while the second symbol display device 83 is showing the winning indication, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S501: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S501: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S504). If the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S504: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S504: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (S505).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S506). In the process of S506, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is acquired (S507).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S508). The time-shortage counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol time-short state, and if the time-shortage counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol time-short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

  When the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S508: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol (S509). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. If it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S509: Yes), the process proceeds to S511. In the present embodiment, the special symbol lottery is difficult to win during the special symbol jackpot. This is because during a big hit of a special symbol (that is, during a special game state), the player hits a ball in an attempt to win a specific winning slot 65a, but the electric accessory attached to the first winning slot 64 is released. This is for the purpose of suppressing as much as possible that the ball intended to win the specific winning opening 65a enters the first winning opening 64. In addition, since the specific winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first entrance 64, even if the ball is prevented from entering the first entrance 64 during the big hit of the special symbol, A lot of balls enter the entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  In the process of S509, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S509: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol, so acquired in the process of S507. Based on the value of the second per-random number counter C4 and the second per-random number table 202c for high probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S510). Specifically, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second per-random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 11D).

  In the process of S508, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S508: No), the process proceeds to S511. In the process of S511, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S507, Based on the second random number table 202c for probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S511). Specifically, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second per-random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 29-239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 11D).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S510 or S511 is a normal symbol win (S512). If it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S512: Yes) The display mode for winning is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S514). If the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S514: Yes), the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S515). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S515: Yes), the process proceeds to S517. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the sphere from entering the first entrance 64 as much as possible, even when it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as when the normal symbol is off In addition, the number of opening times and the opening time of the electric accessory are set.

  In the process of S515, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S515: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in a special symbol big hit, and the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol. The opening period of the electric accessory attached to 64 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S516), and the process proceeds to S519. In the process of S514, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S514: No), the process proceeds to S517. In the process of S517, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set to 0. In addition to setting for 2 seconds, the number of releases is set to 1 (S517), and the process proceeds to S519.

  If it is determined in step S512 that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S512: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S518). In the process of S518, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S519.

  In the process of S519, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S519), and if the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S519: Yes), the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 is detected. The display variation time is set to 3 seconds (S520), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S519: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S521), and this processing is terminated. In this way, except for the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, Since the release period of the first entrance 64 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64.

  In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S522). The variation time here is a time set in advance by the processing of S520 or the processing of S521 before the variable display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the processing of S522 (S522: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the process of S522 (S522: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S523). In the process of S523, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S513, the “○” symbol as the second symbol is stopped in the second symbol display device 83. It is set to be displayed (lighted display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S518, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is displayed in the second symbol display device 83 as a stop display (lights on). Display). When the stop display is set by the process of S523, when the second symbol display update process (see S907) of the main process (see FIG. 30) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lighted display) in the display mode set in the processing of S513 or S518.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol hit when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started. Is determined (S524). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S524: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set (S525), and this process is terminated. When the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the processing of S525, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S905) of the main process (see FIG. 30) is executed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S516 or S517 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S524, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S524: No), the process of S525 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67, and there is a ball passing. Is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S601). Here, the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S602). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S603).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the second entrance 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball has passed through the second entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is 4. If not less than this (S603: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second entrance 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the number of normal symbol reserved balls The value (M) of the counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. (S605), and this process ends. In the process of S605, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S701), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S801). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S802). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S804). If it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process proceeds to S810. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S805), and if not stored (S805: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shut-off has not ended normally, the process proceeds to S810 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), a RAM determination value is calculated (S806). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S807: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S810. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S915 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S810, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S810). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S811, S812) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S811, S812) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process (S811, S812) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S811, S812), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S811), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S812). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S813.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S805: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S8907: Yes), the information on the occurrence of power interruption is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S808). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power interruption is transmitted (S809), and the process proceeds to S813. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S813, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S814), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above startup process will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S901 to S908 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S911 and S912 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, during execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each control device (peripheral). External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S901). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 22) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 23) or the start winning process (see FIG. 25) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the winning information command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 25) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, a specification information command, etc. necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 31) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903), and then, when the special symbol is in the big hit state, execution of the big hit effect or variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning slot 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is executed (S905). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S525 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 26), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S516 or the processing of S517 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S906). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the processing of S210 or the processing of S211 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 23), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Begin at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23) or the process of S309 is completed, the first symbol display device The variation display being executed in 37 is ended, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display in the display mode set by the processing of S306 or the processing of S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 23). The device 37 is stopped (lighted).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S907). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S520 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 26) or the process of S521, the variation display is performed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S523 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 26), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. The display of the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S513 or the processing of S518 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 26). (Lights up).

  Next, a specification information command is set (S908). This spec information command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of spec information such as the jackpot probability of the pachinko machine 10 set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the number of winning balls. . As described above, the specification information is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 every 4 ms by the main process (FIG. 30), so the sound lamp control device 113 can periodically check the specification information. Therefore, when a power interruption occurs only in the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, and the sub display control device 900, the specification information can be confirmed promptly after the return, and the specification held by noise Even when an abnormality occurs in the information data, it can be changed to data corresponding to the correct specification information.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S909). SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S910). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S910: Yes), the process proceeds to S901, and the above-described processes after S901 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S910: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S911, S912).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S911). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S902 (S912).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S901 to S908 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S909, if the occurrence information of the power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S909: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 28 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S913 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S913), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S914). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S915), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S916), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  It should be noted that the processing of S909 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S901 to S908, or at the end of one cycle of S911 and S processing performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. The process can be started from S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the initialization process (S801) without saving the stack pointer value. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S901. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S904). This jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30). When the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or a specific prize opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1001). Specifically, if the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 23) S213 is executed and the special symbol jackpot start is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1001, when a special symbol jackpot is started (S1001: Yes), an opening command is set (S1002), and this process ends.

  The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the opening command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1001, when the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1001: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is being hit (S1003). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1003, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S1003: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1003, if the special symbol is a big hit (1003: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1004). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1004: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened (S1005), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1006). After the round number command is set, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1004, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1004: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1007). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, or a predetermined number of balls have been opened after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the process of S1007, when the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1007: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1008), and this process is terminated. To do. On the other hand, if the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1007: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1009). Specifically, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect when the special gaming state (all five rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual is completed.

  In the processing of S1009, when it is the ending effect start timing (S1009: Yes), an ending command is set (S1010), and then it is determined whether the type of jackpot is jackpot A or jackpot B (S1011). . When it is determined that the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (S1011: Yes), the probability variation flag 203e is set to ON (S1012), and the process proceeds to S1015. In the process of S1011, when it is determined that the type of jackpot is not jackpot A or jackpot B, that is, jackpot C or jackpot D (S1011: No), the probability variation flag 203e is set to OFF (S1013), and the time reduction The value of the middle counter 203f is set to 100 (S1014), and the process proceeds to S1015. In the process of S1015, the end of the jackpot is set, and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, if it is not the ending start timing in the processing of S1009 (S1009: No), this processing is terminated.

<Control processing executed by the sound lamp control device 113>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, referring to FIG. 32, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1101). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-up processing in S1216 (see FIG. 33) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S1102). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 33, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1213 in FIG. 33), it executes a power-off process in S1216. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1216 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1102: No), the current start-up processing is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off in S1216 It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1103).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1106. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1103: Yes), the process proceeds to S1104, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1103: No), the process proceeds to S1108.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1103: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1104. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1216, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1103: No), and the process proceeds to S1108.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1102: Yes), the current ramp-up process is performed after an instantaneous power failure and during the execution of the power-off process in S1216, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1104, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1104). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1105: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1106). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1105: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1107), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S1108, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1108). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1216 is executed (see S1215 in FIG. 33). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1216 is executed, the current startup process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1216 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1108: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1109), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1110), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1111), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S1108 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down, so that the process of S1108 is performed via the processes of S1104 to S1106. This is a case where the process has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1108: No), S1109, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1110, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1110), and interrupt permission is set. In step S1111, the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1109 is that when the process from S1104 to S1108 is reached via the process in S1106, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1104. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the current processing of S1201 was executed (S1201). If not (S1201: No), the process proceeds to S1211 without performing the processes in S1202 to S1210. In step S1201, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed. S1202 to S1210 are mainly processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1211, the variable display setting process of S1212, and the process of updating the counter value (not shown) executed after the process of S1212 in a short cycle. By executing S1211 processing in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of commands transmitted from the main controller 110. By executing S1212 processing in a short cycle, the commands received by the command determination processing can be changed. Based on this, it is possible to make a setting related to the variation effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the processing of S1201 (S1201: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1203 to S1212 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1202). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1208 described later are set (S1203), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (S1204). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1205 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1205, a waiting-for-waiting effect process is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S1206). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process for turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1207). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Also, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the change effect is not executed or during the high-speed change period, a process for changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image corresponding to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expectation of the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production | presentation which can have, or selecting the reach | reduction effect of the frame button 22 among several reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1307 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, a lamp editing process is executed (S1208), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1209). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process (S1209), the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and it corresponds to each language set according to the setting. Sound is output from the audio output device 226. The sound editing / output processing (S1209) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  After the process of S1209, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1210), and the process proceeds to S1311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process in S1208 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1209 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1211, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1211). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1212, a variable display setting process is executed (S1212). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of the change display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the processing of S1212, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1213). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1213 (S1213: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1215), and the power interruption processing is executed (S1216). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1217), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on the occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1213 (S1213: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1214), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1214: No), the process returns to S1201, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1214: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S1211) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1211). This command determination processing (S1211) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . Further, in this process, when the reserved ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the third symbol display device 81 also determines to start the continuous notice effect.

  In the command determination process (S1211), first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern from the main control device 110 is analyzed. It is determined whether a command has been received (S1301). When the variation pattern command is received (S1301: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1302), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1303). Return to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 35) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type. Next, a sub display variation start command for notifying the sub display control device 114 of the start of variation of the special symbol is set (S1304). This sub-display change start command is configured so that information indicating the current gaming state can be determined.

  On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1301: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1305). When the stop type command is received (S1305: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1306), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1307). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 35) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1305: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1308). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1308: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 (special symbol). Is extracted and stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1309). In the processing of S1309, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the process of S1309 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, since the number-of-holding balls command is sent from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning) or when a special symbol lottery is performed, the starting win is received. Is detected, or every time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main control device 110 by the processing of S1309. It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, At the time of symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the processing of S1408 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, after executing the processing of S1309, a sub-display reserved ball number command for notifying the number of held balls may be set to the sub-display device 900. By configuring in this way, it is possible to display information on the number of reserved balls on the sub display device 901. Specifically, when the number of held balls increases or decreases, it is possible to display an explanation of the reason and how many times the lottery is executed by the holding ball.

  In the process of S1308, if the pending ball number command has not been received (S1308: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1310). Then, when a winning information command is received (S1310: Yes), winning information (such as determination of whether or not to hold the ball and variation pattern type) is extracted from the received winning information command and stored in the winning information storage area 223a. (S1311). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If the winning information command has not been received in the process of S1310 (S1310: No), it is determined whether a command related to the jackpot game has been received from the main controller 110 (S1312). The command related to the jackpot game corresponds to an opening command, a round command, an ending command, and the like. When it is determined that the command related to the jackpot game has been received (S1312: Yes), the processing related to the jackpot corresponding to the received command is executed (S1313), and the received command is sent to the sub display control device 900. A sub-display jackpot command for notifying the jackpot information shown is set (S1316). This sub-display jackpot command is notified of the number of rounds, jackpot type, and the like. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1312 that a command related to the jackpot game has not been received (S1312: No), it is determined whether a command indicating the spec information of the pachinko machine 10 is received from the main controller 110 (S1315). ). The command indicating the spec information includes jackpot game probabilities (normal time, probability change), prize balls, number of winning prize balls at the time of jackpot, model name information, probability change ratio, ratio of jackpot type, and the like. When it is determined that a command indicating spec information is received (S1315: Yes), a sub display spec information command for notifying the sub display control device 900 of the contents of the received spec information is set. (S1316). Thereafter, this process is terminated. As described above, the main control device 110 uses the specification information command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the specification information of the pachinko machine 10 in the processing of S908 (executed every 4 ms) in the main processing (see FIG. 30). Set. Therefore, the specification information can be received from the main control device 110 every predetermined period. Therefore, when power interruption occurs only in the audio lamp control device 113, or when the stored spec information is erased because power interruption occurs only in the sub display control device 900, or because of noise, etc. Even when an error occurs in the spec information, correct spec information can be stored.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1315 that the specification information command has not been received (S1315: No), it is determined whether a language setting command has been received from the sub display control device 900 (S1317). If it is determined that a language setting command has been received (S1317: Yes), the selected language flag 223f corresponding to the language indicated by the received command is set to ON (S1318). A display language setting command for notifying the language set in the display control device 114 is set (S1319). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1317 that a language setting command has not been received (S1317: No), it is determined whether another command has been received, and processing according to the received command is executed. The process returns to the main process (S1320). For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the variable display setting process (S1212) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S1212). This variable display setting process (S1212) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1401). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1401: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S1406. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S1401: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S1402), and then the fluctuation pattern is determined in the process of S1303 of the command determination process (see FIG. 34). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1403).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S1404). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1405). In the process of S1405, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1406.

  In the process of S1406, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1406). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, is off) (S1406: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, and therefore, this change display The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1406: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1407), and then in the process of S1307 of the command determination process (see FIG. 34), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1408). Next, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1409). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Next, the sound editing / output process (S1209), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the sound lamp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36A is a flowchart showing the contents of the sound editing / output process (S1209).

  In the sound editing / output process (S1209), first, it is determined whether or not sound output is set (S1501). The audio output setting is set when a variation pattern is set, or when an error, a demo, or the like is set. Here, in the audio output setting, the output timing and the difference address (addition address) between the audio data to be output are set. If it is determined in the processing of S1501 that the audio output setting has not been made (S1501: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the audio output setting has been made (S1501: Yes), a head address corresponding to the set language is set based on the language selection flag 223f (S1502). A differential address corresponding to the audio data set for output is set (S1503). The voice data stored in the address obtained by adding the difference address set in S1503 from the head address set in the process of S1502 is selected from the voice language storage area 222b (S1504). The selected audio data is set for the audio output device 226. The audio output device 226 is set by specifying the output timing of the set audio. Thereby, the audio | voice output apparatus 226 can output the audio | voice data set based on the designated timing.

<Control processing executed by display control device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, a main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36B is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S1901), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S1901) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S1901) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when random access is performed. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program or fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-described hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2001). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2002). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2001.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2002, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2002, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program that is started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2003). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2004), the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the boot process (see S1901 in FIG. 36B) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process to be executed later (see S1902 in FIG. 36B) (S2005), the boot program is finished and the boot process is finished.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S1901), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 37, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2001 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2001 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S2002. It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processes in S2003 to S2005 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S2001 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2001. And after repeating several times including the process of S2002, you may make it perform the process of S2003-S2005.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2003 to S2005 without performing the processes of S2001 and S2002. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1902). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S1903). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1903, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S1904). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1904, then, the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S1905). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 48A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S3402 in FIG. 48A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thus, during this time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 38B), the simple command determination process (see FIG. 38) is performed so that a power-on image (power-on main image or power-on variation image) is drawn. 38 (b) (see S2208) and simple display setting processing (see S2209 in FIG. 38 (b)).

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, the player enters the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the main control device 110 instructs the start of the variation effect by controlling the sound lamp. When the display 113 is used, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, a variation image at power-on (“◯” and “×” images) is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and the display is simple. It is possible to perform various fluctuation effects. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S1905, interrupt permission is set (S1906), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1906, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2101), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38B, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 38B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. A list (see FIG. 21) is created, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 38B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2201), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S2201: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so that the normal effect image is displayed instead of the power-on image. In order to display on the display device 81, a command determination process (S2202) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2203) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2202), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command interrupt processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2203), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2202) or the like. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process (S2203) is executed, a task process is then executed (S2204). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2203) or the simple display setting process (S2209). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2205). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2206). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2204), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2205) are used. 21 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2207). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2207, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of a display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type (big hit A to big hit D, outreach reach, complete outage) indicated by the display stop type command The stop type counter is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2201 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2201: Yes), this means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2208) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S2209) is executed, and the process proceeds to S2204.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 39 to 44, details of the above-described command determination process (S2202) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the command determination process.

  In this command determination process (S2202), as shown in FIG. 39, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2301), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2301: No), the command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2301: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2203) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2302), and then the command The command types of all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed (S2303).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among unprocessed commands (S2304). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2304: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2305), the process returns to S2301.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2305) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process. This variation pattern command processing (S2305) executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command process (S2305), first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table buffer 233d is set (S2401).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2401, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2401 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2402). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S2301 is turned on, and other variations The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to OFF (S2403). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2403, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Judgment can be made.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2401, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2404), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2405). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2406), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer 233f initialized by the processing in S2405 is updated, and the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing in S2401 is updated. Then, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S2402. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2404, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in step S2304 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2304: No), it is then determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2306). If there is a display variation type command (S2306: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2307), and the processing returns to S2301.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S2307) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to stop type information (big hit A to big hit D, out of reach or complete out) indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S2501), and the stop is performed. The type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V-interrupt process (see FIG. 38B) is executed, and after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 A stop symbol is finally set (S2502).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2502 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to off (S2503).

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S2502 is described. In the task process (S2204) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S2502 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S2503, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  Returning to FIG. 39, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2306 that there is no display stop type command (S2306: No), it is then determined whether there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S2308). If it is determined that there is an opening command (S2308: Yes), opening command processing is executed (S2309). Thereafter, the process returns to S2301.

  Here, the opening command process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41A is a flowchart showing the contents of the opening command process (S2309). This opening command process (S2309) executes a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the opening command process (S2309), first, an opening display data table corresponding to the opening pattern indicated by the opening command is determined, the determined opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table buffer 233d. (S2601).

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table set in S2601 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2602). Next, time data corresponding to the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2601 is set in the time counter 233h (S2603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2604). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2605), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2308 that there is no display opening command (S2308: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2310). If there is a round number command for use (S2310: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S2311), and the process returns to S2301.

  Here, the round number command processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41B is a flowchart showing the contents of the round number command process (S2311). This round number command processing (S2311) is to execute processing corresponding to the round number command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing (S2311), first, a display data table corresponding to the round number and jackpot type indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table buffer 233d is set (S2701). Here, if the jackpot type is a jackpot A or jackpot C, that is, a 16-round jackpot, a display data table in which a treasure is displayed in the fourth round is set. On the other hand, if the jackpot B or jackpot D, a display data table in which no treasure is displayed in the fourth round is set.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2701 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2702). Next, time data corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2701 is set in the time counter 233h (S2703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S2705), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2310 that there is no display round number command (S2310: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2312). If there is an ending command for use (S2312: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S2313), and the process returns to S2301.

  Here, the ending command processing (S2313) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending command process (S2313). This ending command process (S2313) executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the ending command process (S2313), first, an ending image display data table corresponding to the jackpot type is determined, and the determined display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2801). ). Here, if the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, that is, the probability variation jackpot, the display data table which is an ending display mode in which characters of “probability rushing in!” Indicating the transition to the probability variation gaming state are displayed. Is set. On the other hand, if it is jackpot C or jackpot D, the display data table of the ending display mode in which the character of "100 times a hour" which shows shifting to a time saving game state is displayed is set.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2801 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2802). Next, time data corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2801 is set in the time counter 233h (S2803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2805), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2312 that there is no display ending command (S2312: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display language setting command among the unprocessed commands (S2314). If there is a language setting command (S2314: Yes), the language setting command process is executed (S2315), and the process returns to S2301. Here, the language setting command for display is output from the sub display control device 900 when the language setting is executed by the sub display control device 900.

  Here, the language setting command process (S2315) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the contents of the language setting command process (S2315). In the language setting command processing (S2315), processing for setting the language displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the language notified by the sub display control device 900 is executed.

  In the language setting command process (S2315 in FIG. 43), first, the language setting flag 233m corresponding to the language indicated by the received display language setting command is set to ON (S2901).

  The head address of the display language data storage area 235f corresponding to the language set in the process of S2901 is set (S2902). The head address of the display notice data storage area 235g corresponding to the language set in the process of S2901 is set (S2903).

  Here, if character data is set in each display data table, a difference address of the character data type is set. Based on the difference address, the character data stored in the address obtained by adding the difference address from the head address set in the processing of S2902 is selected from the display language data storage area 235f and is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. Set. With this configuration, even if the language is switched, the language to be displayed can be switched using the same display data table. Therefore, the display language can be switched with an easy configuration.

  In addition, for the character (see FIGS. 7B to 7C) that is the notice symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a differential address is set in the display data table, and the address is processed in S2903. By adding to the head address set in step S3 and selecting the character information from the display-use notice data storage area 235g, a notice character corresponding to the language can be selected. Therefore, even if the language is switched, the characters can be switched corresponding to the language using the same display data table.

  In the present embodiment, the difference data is used to select the character data and the notice character. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a dedicated selection command or selection table is used for each language character data. You may comprise so that it may select.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2314 that there is no display language setting command (S2314: No), it is then determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2316). If there is (S2316: Yes), an error command process is executed (S2317), and the process returns to S2301.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 44, the details of the error command processing (S2317) will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing error command processing (S2317). This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3001). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S3002). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3001, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S3002 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S3002, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2216 that there is no error command (S2216: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2318), and the processing returns to S2301.

  In the processing of S2301, which is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2301: Yes). ), The processing of S2302 to S2318 is executed again. Then, the processing of S2301 to S2318 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. If it is determined in S2301 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination The process ends.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 38B), the simple command determination process (S2209) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are displayed. Extraction is performed, and the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 40 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 40 (b)), which are processing corresponding to each command, are executed. The process corresponding to the command is discarded without executing the process.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 40A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2401. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2402, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233b and the content is cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 45 to 47, the details of the display setting process (S2203) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the display setting process.

  In this display setting process (S2203), as shown in FIG. 45, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3101), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S3101: No), it is determined that a new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the processing of S3102 to S3104 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S3105. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3101: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S3102), S3103 to S3104 By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S3103, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S3103). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3103: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S3104).

  Details of the warning image setting process (S3104) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process (S3104). This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3201).

  In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are drawn for each sprite. Determine the various parameters required. In the warning image setting process, after the process of S3201, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3202), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3104) or in the process of S3103, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S3103: No), the process proceeds to S3105.

  In S3105, pointer update processing is executed (S3105). Here, the details of the pointer update process (S3105) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process (S3105). This pointer update processing (S3105) is performed by using the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively, and the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data. Is a process of updating the pointer 233f that designates the address to acquire the.

  In this pointer update processing (S3105), first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3301). That is, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S3301, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S3302). As a result, if it is End information (S3302: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3303). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S3303: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3304), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3305), and this process is terminated. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3303, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the display data table for demonstration (S3303: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( In step S3306, the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3302: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 45, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process (S3105), the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3106). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing image expanded in the processing of S3106 together with the previously developed warning image and the display coordinates for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (S3107), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3108). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3108: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or less than 0 (S3108: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S3109).

  As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S3109: Yes), the confirmation display effect is not yet performed and the confirmation display effect is performed. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S3110), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3111). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3112), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3113). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3114), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3115), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233b to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S3115 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the task processing (S2204), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S3115, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the confirmation display flag is OFF instead of ON in the processing of S3109 (S3109: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S3116). If the demo display flag is off (S3116: Yes), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so the display data table for demonstration is displayed as the display data table. The buffer 233d is set (S3117), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3118). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3119). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3120), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3121), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  In the process of S3116, if the demonstration display flag is on (S3116: No), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 38B), the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S2209) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The display data table buffer 233d is set to a display data table that stipulates that the image (“◯” image or “×” image) is stopped and displayed.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 48 and 49, details of the transfer setting process (S2205) described above, which is a process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 38B) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. explain. First, FIG. 48A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process (S2205).

  In this transfer setting process (S2205), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3401). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3401: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S3402), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S3401, that is, if it is off (S3401: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3403), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3402), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2205) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3402).

  In this resident image transfer setting process (S3402), first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S3501), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S3501). Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3502). In the processing of S3502, when an image data transfer instruction is issued to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. . If it is determined in S3502 that the transfer process has not ended (S3502: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3502: Yes), the process proceeds to S3503. Also, as a result of the processing of S3501, when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3501: No), the process proceeds to S3503.

  In the processing of S3503, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3503). If there is untransferred resident target image data (S3503: No), the determination is made. A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the image data to be transferred resides from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3504). A transfer instruction for transferring character data in the untransferred display language data storage area 234d2 to the display language data storage area 235f is set (S3505). Next, a transfer instruction is set for transferring the notice character data in the untransferred display notice data storage area 234d3 to the display notice data storage area 235g (S3506). Thereafter, the resident image transfer setting process (S3402) is terminated.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the head address and final address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the processing of S3503 (S3503: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3507), and the resident image transfer setting processing (S3402) is ended. . Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 38B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2208 in FIG. 38B) and the simple display setting process (see S2209 in FIG. 38B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 39 to 44) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 45 to 47) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 49) (see S3401: No in FIG. 48A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S3403), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S2205) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3403).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3105) of the display setting process (S2203) executed previously is used. Information described at the indicated address is acquired (S3601). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3602). If it is transfer data information (S3602: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( Further, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3604), and the process proceeds to S3605.

  In the process of S3602, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3602: No), the process of S3603 and S3604 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3605. In the process of S3605, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S3605), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3605: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S3606).

  In the process of S3606, when an image data transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process in S3606 (S3606: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3606: Yes), the process proceeds to S3607. Also, as a result of the process of S3605, when the transfer instruction of image data is not set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S3605: No), the process proceeds to S3607.

  In the process of S3607, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3607). If the transfer start flag is on (S3607: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. (S3608), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3603 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S3613. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3607: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S3609). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S3609: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3609: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S3610), the back image provided for each back image type Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S3611). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state, and the transfer destination (normally) The top address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3612), and the process proceeds to S3613.

  When the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S3609, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S3613, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3613). The determination in the process of S3613 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j and the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S3613 (S3613: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3613 (S3613: No), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S3614). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S3614, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S3615), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on” and substituting the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50, details of the above-described drawing process (S2206), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2204) and parameters (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information necessary for drawing each sprite) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2205), the drawing list shown in FIG. 21 is generated (S3701). That is, in the process of S3701, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2204). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2205), the leading address (storage source leading address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S3702). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1, including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as drawing target buffer information Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3702, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S3703). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedded process (see FIG. 38B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

<Control processing executed by sub display control device 900>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 261 of the sub display control apparatus 900 will be described with reference to FIGS. The sub display control device 900 mainly executes processing based on display control of the side display device 901 and a touch operation on the side display device 901.

  With reference to FIG. 51, the main process (S4000) performed by MPU261 of the sub display control apparatus 900 is demonstrated. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the contents of the main process (S4000).

  In the main process (S4000), first, a boot process is executed (S4001). In this boot process (S4001), the process shown in FIG. 52 is executed. This boot process (FIG. 52, S4001) is the same as the processes from S2001 to S2005 executed in the boot process (FIG. 37, S1901) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Therefore, the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is then executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 263a of the work RAM 263 (S4002). Specifically, since it is the same as the initial setting process (FIG. 36B, S1902) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, a detailed description is omitted.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 267 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 265a at power-on of the resident video RAM 265 (S4003). The process of S4003 is the same as the process of S1903 executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, but the characters “Loading Now” are displayed in the content of the image when the power is turned on. As a result, even if the player is a foreigner, it can be recognized that the screen is widely being initially set. The power-on image is also provided with a storage means capable of storing the language setting before the power is turned off, and configured to display an image indicating the initial setting in a language corresponding to the language setting. May be.

  After the processing of S4003 is executed, the simple image display flag 263c is turned on (S4004). Thus, while the simple image display flag 263c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 265 is transferred from the character ROM 264 to the resident video RAM 265 in a transfer setting process (FIG. 54B, S4505) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing transfer to the image controller 267 is executed (see FIG. 60A and S5502).

  The simple image display flag 263c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 265 from the character ROM 264 to the resident video RAM 265 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 267 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 54B), the simple command determination process (see FIG. 54) is performed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) is drawn. 54 (b) S4512) and simple display setting processing (see S4513 of FIG. 54 (b)) are executed.

  After the processing of S4004 is executed, language initial setting processing is executed (S4005). The language initial setting process (S4005) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 53, but the pachinko machine 10 executes a process for determining a language to be set when the power is turned on.

  Here, the language initial setting process (S4005) executed by the MPU 261 of the sub display control apparatus 900 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the contents of the language initial setting process (S4005). In the language initial setting process (S4005), first, it is determined whether or not the setting switch 301 is set to ON (S4301). This setting switch 301 is a slide-type switch provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, and is a switch for the game store side to set whether or not to perform language setting based on information from the GPS 302 when the power is turned on. It is.

  If it is determined that the setting switch 301 is set to ON (S4301: Yes), the current position data (GPS data) is read from the GPS 302 (S4302). It is determined whether the read data is a normal value (S4303). The determination as to whether or not this is normal determines whether the position data is not actually present (outside the position data set as settable). Also, when position data cannot be read, it is determined as abnormal.

  If it is determined in the process of S4303 that the read position data is normal (S4303: Yes), the display language setting flag 263p corresponding to the language set from the language selection table 264a2 based on the position data read from the GPS 302. Is set (S4304). Here, each language is set in the language selection table 264a2 in correspondence with the position data of the GPS 302. Then, by storing the display language setting flag 263p with a value (flag) indicating the corresponding language, the language set in the initial setting can be determined.

  After the processing of S4304 is executed, a language setting command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the language indicated by the display language setting flag 263p is set (S4305). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  As described above, by automatically determining the position (latitude, longitude) where the pachinko machine 10 is installed by the GPS 302, the language used at the place can be set. Therefore, it is possible to save the game store from having to set the language each time.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting switch 301 is OFF in the process of S4301 (S4301) or if it is determined that the position data of the GPS 302 is abnormal in the process of S4301 (S4303: No), the process of S4307 is executed. To do. In the process of S4307, the display language setting flag 263p corresponding to the default language (Japanese in this embodiment) preset in the pachinko machine 10 is set to ON (S4307). The language setting flag 263r is set to ON (S4308). Thereafter, the process of S4305 is executed. Here, when the language setting flag 263r is set to ON, a language setting screen (see FIG. 5A) is displayed for the player or the game store so as to set the language. Therefore, the game can be started by setting the language desired by the game store or the player.

  In this way, when the setting switch 301 is set not to execute language setting by GPS, the language is set as a default and displayed on the side display device 901 so as to set language switching. Therefore, the initial language can be set in accordance with the situation of the game store (customer customer base, etc.). Further, when the GPS 302 data is not normal, the default setting is made and the setting screen is displayed, so that the amusement shop side can determine that there is an abnormality in the GPS 302 data.

  Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 261 of the sub display control apparatus 900 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 261 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 263 (S4401), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54B, a V interrupt process executed by the MPU 261 of the sub display control apparatus 900 will be described. FIG. 54B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. This V-interrupt process (see FIG. 54B) is different from the above-described V-interrupt process (see FIG. 38B) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in S4504, S4506 to S4507, and S4512. Since the processing of S4513 is the same as the processing of S2204, S2206 to S2207, and S2208 to S2209, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 54B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 263c is on (S4501), and the simple image display flag 263c is not on. If it is off (S4501: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 265 has been completed, so that the normal display image is displayed instead of the power-on image. A command determination process (S4502) is executed in order to display on the screen 901, and then a display setting process (S4503) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S4502), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the sub-display demonstration command is executed. If the sub display variation pattern command is stored, the sub display data table for displaying the spec information displayed at the time of the demonstration on the side display device 901 or the sub display data table for displaying the game method is displayed. In addition to setting in the table buffer 263d, a transfer data table corresponding to the set sub display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 263e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. This command determination process (S4502) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S4503), based on the contents of the sub display data table set in the display data table buffer 263d by the command determination process (S4502) or the like, an image for one frame to be displayed next on the side display device 901 is displayed. Specific content is specified. Further, the display mode to be displayed on the side display device 901 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the sub display data table corresponding to the determined rendering mode is set in the display data table buffer 263d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the display setting process (S4503) is executed, a task process is then executed (S4504). In this task process, sprites constituting the image based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the side display device 901 specified by the display setting process (S4503) or the simple display setting process (S4513). The type of (display object) is specified, and various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S4505). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 263c is on, the image controller 267 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 265 from the character ROM 264 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 265. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 263c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 264 to the normal use for the image controller 267 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 263e. A transfer instruction for transferring to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 266a of the video RAM 266 is set. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S4506). In this drawing process, from the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S4504), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S4505). A drawing list (similar to FIG. 21) is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 267 together with the drawing target buffer information. Accordingly, the image controller 267 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the sub display control device 900 is executed (S4507). Next, a language setting process is executed (S4508). In this language setting process (S4508), a language setting screen (see FIG. 5A) is displayed and a process of setting a language based on the touch operation is executed. This language setting process (S4508) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, input detection processing is executed (S4509). In this input detection process (S4509), the touch operation of the side display device 901 connected to the sub display control device 900 is determined, and the process based on the touch operation is executed. This input detection process (S4509) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, camera setting processing is executed (S4510). In this camera setting process (S4510), image data captured by the camera 303 connected to the sub display control device 900 is read, face recognition is executed based on the image data, and language setting based on the recognition result is performed. Execute the process to be executed. This camera setting process (S4510) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a firing detection process is executed (S4511). In this launch detection process (S4511), a launch of a game ball is determined, and a process of switching the display of the side display device 901 from a demo state to an explanation of a normal game method is executed. Details of this firing detection process (S4511) will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, the V interrupt process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4501 that the simple image display flag 263c is on (S4501: Yes), this means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 265 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the side display device 901, the simple command determination process (S4512) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S4513) is executed, and the process proceeds to S4504.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 to 58, details of the above-described command determination process (S4502), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 261 of the sub display control apparatus 900, will be described. First, FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process (S4502), as shown in FIG. 55, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S4601), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S4601: No), the command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S4601: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S4603) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S4602), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S4603).

  In the unprocessed command, first, it is determined whether or not there is a sub display spec information command (S4604). If there is a sub display spec information command (S4604: Yes), the spec information command processing is performed. Execute (S4605) and return to the process of S4601.

  Here, the details of the specification information command process (S4605) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the specification information command process (S4605). This spec information command process (S4605) is to execute a process corresponding to the sub display spec information command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the specification information command processing (S4605), first, the specification information indicated by the received sub-display specification information command is compared with the specification information set in the specification information storage area 263k to determine whether the specification information has changed. (S4701). If it is determined that the spec information is changed (S4701: Yes), it is determined whether the received spec information is normal (S4702). Here, whether or not it is normal is determined whether it is within the range of the set normal spec information. For example, it is determined whether or not the jackpot probability is within a game rule range.

  If it is determined that the received spec information is normal (S4702: Yes), the received spec information is stored in the spec information storage area 263k (S4703). Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4701 that there is no change in the spec information (S4701: No), or if it is determined that the spec information received in S4702 is abnormal (S4702: No), this process ends.

  As described above, since the specification information can be received from the sound lamp control device 113 at regular intervals, when the power failure occurs in the sub display control device 900 or in the specification information data stored due to noise or the like. Even if an abnormality occurs, correct spec information can be set again.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S4604 that there is no sub display specification information command (S4604: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a sub display variation start command among the unprocessed commands (S4606). ), If there is a sub-display change start command (S4606: Yes), change start command processing is executed (S4607), and the process returns to S4601.

  Details of the change start command process (S4607) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the change start command process (S4607). This variation start command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the sub display variation start command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the change start command process (S4607), first, the game state (any one of the normal game state, the probability change game state, and the short time game state) indicated by the sub display change start command and the game state stored in the state storage area 263m. It is determined whether or not there is a change (not matched) (S4801). If it is determined that there is a change in the gaming state, the state flag 263n is set to ON (S4802). The gaming state indicated by the received sub-display change start command is stored in the state storage area 263 (S4803). Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no change in the gaming state (S4801: No), this process ends.

  In this way, the gaming state can be determined by the sub-display variation start command that is output from the sound lamp control device 114 every time the variation of the special symbol starts, so that the gaming state is switched and stored based on the variation start. be able to. Therefore, the display mode displayed on the side display device 901 can be changed in accordance with the transition of the gaming state.

  Returning to FIG. 55, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S4606 that there is no sub-display stop type command (S4606: No), it is then determined whether there is a sub-display jackpot information command among unprocessed commands (S4608). When it is determined that there is a sub-display jackpot information command (S4608: Yes), jackpot information command processing is executed (S4609). Thereafter, the processing returns to S4601.

  Here, the jackpot information command processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot information command process (S4609). This jackpot information command processing (S4609) is to execute processing corresponding to the sub-display jackpot information command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the jackpot information command processing (S4609), it is first determined whether the jackpot information indicated by the sub-display jackpot information command is information indicating a jackpot ending (S4901). When it is determined that the information represents the jackpot ending (S4901: Yes), the status flag 263n is set to ON (S4902), and the information indicating the end of the jackpot is set in the status storage area 263m (S4903). . Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received sub-display jackpot information command is not information indicating a jackpot ending (S4901: No), it is determined whether the received command is a command indicating a jackpot opening (start) (S4904). ). When it is determined that the command indicates an opening (S4904: Yes), the status flag 263n is set to ON (S4905), and information indicating the start of a big hit is set in the status storage area 263m (S4906). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4904 that the received command is not information indicating opening (S4904: No), this process ends.

  As described above, when the jackpot is started, the state flag 263n is turned on, so that the contents of the side display device 901 can be switched to the contents of the jackpot start set in the state storage area 263m. In addition, since the display can be switched even at the end timing of the jackpot, the player can recognize the start and end of the jackpot in an easy-to-understand manner. Further, in the present embodiment, during the jackpot game, the jackpot commentary as shown in FIG. 7A is displayed on the side display device 901, but the display switching can be switched based on the start of the jackpot game. Therefore, the jackpot game can be explained in an easy-to-understand manner to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the display mode of the side display device 901 is switched at the opening timing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the voice lamp control device 113 notifies that the special symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a big hit. It may be configured to switch to the display of jackpot based on the timing. By configuring in this way, the jackpot can be explained before the start of the jackpot, and the player can make the game easier to understand from the start of the jackpot.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S4608 that there is no sub-display jackpot information command (S4608: No), then it is determined whether there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S4610), and the error command If there is (S4610: Yes), error command processing is executed (S4611), and the processing returns to S4601. In this error command process, the same process as the error command process (FIG. 44, S2317) executed in the display control device 114 is executed, and therefore detailed description thereof is omitted.

  If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S4610 (S4610: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S4612), and the process returns to S4601.

  In the process of S4601 that is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S4601: Yes). ), The processing of S4602 to S4612 is executed again. Then, the processing of S4601 to S4612 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in S4601 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination The process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the details of the display setting process (S4503) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 261 of the sub display control apparatus 900, will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process (S4503), as shown in FIG. 59, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S5001). If the error occurrence flag is on (S5001: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S5002). Since the warning image setting process (S5002) is the same as the warning image setting process (FIG. 46, S3104) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  After the warning image setting process (S5002) or in the process of S5001, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S5001: No), the process proceeds to S5003.

  In S5003, pointer update processing is executed (S5003). Since this pointer update process (S5003) is the same as the pointer update process (FIG. 47, S3105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  After the pointer update process (S5003), the drawing contents at the address indicated by the pointer 263f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the sub display data table set in the display data table buffer 263d (S5004). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing image developed in the processing of S5004 together with the warning image previously developed, and the display coordinates for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 263h (S5005). In this embodiment, when the value of the time counter 263h becomes 0 until a new sub display data table is set, the initial value set first is set. That is, the same display is repeatedly executed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the language setting flag 263r is on (S5006). Here, when the language setting flag 263r is on, the language setting screen shown in FIG. 5A is displayed, so that the display is not switched. If it is determined in the process of S5006 that the language setting flag 263r is on, this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5006 that the language setting flag 263r is off (S5006: No), it is determined whether the status flag 263n is on (S5007). In the process of S5007, when it is determined that the status flag 263n is off (S5007: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the state flag 263n is on (S5007: Yes), it indicates that it is the timing when the gaming state or the jackpot state is changed (switched). In the process of S5007, when it is determined that the state flag 263n is on (S5007: Yes), the game state set in the state storage area 263m and the language indicated by the display language setting flag 263p are handled. A sub display data table is selected from the data table storage area 263b and set in the display data table buffer 263d (S5008). In the data table storage area 263b, sub display data tables A to F shown in FIG. 18 are set. In each sub display data table, a gaming state (including a jackpot state) when selected is set. ing.

  Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 263e to clear the contents (S5009). Then, time data corresponding to the set time of the sub display data table is set in the time counter 263h (S5010), and the value of the pointer 263f is initialized to 0 (S5011). The status flag 263n is set to OFF (S5012), and then this process ends.

  As described above, when the state flag 263n is set to ON, a new corresponding sub display data table is set, so that the display mode of the side display device 901 is switched to the content corresponding to the gaming state (including the jackpot state). Can do. In the present embodiment, the type of the sub display data table is the type shown in FIG. 18, but the type is not limited thereto, and types corresponding to various game states may be set, or one game state may be set. Thus, it may be configured to select and set from a plurality of sub display data tables.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 60 and 61, details of the transfer setting process (S4505) described above, which is a process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 54B) executed by the MPU 261 of the sub-display control apparatus 900. Will be described. First, FIG. 60A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process (S4505).

  In this transfer setting process (S4505), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 263c is on (S5501). If the simple image display flag 263c is on (S5501: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 265 has not been transferred from the character ROM 264 to the resident video RAM 265. The process is executed (S5502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 265 from the character ROM 264 to the resident video RAM 265 is set to the image controller 267. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 263c is not on as a result of the processing of S5501, that is, if it is off (S5501: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 265 is transferred from the character ROM 264 to the resident video. The data is transferred to the RAM 265. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S5503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 264 is performed to the normal video RAM 266. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a resident image transfer setting process (S5502), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S4505) executed by the MPU 261 of the sub display control apparatus 900, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S5502).

  In this resident image transfer setting process (S5502), first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 267 (S5601), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S5601). Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 267 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S5601: Yes). In the process of S5602, when an image data transfer instruction is issued to the image controller 267 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 267, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S5602 that the transfer process has not ended (S5602: No), the image controller 267 continues the image transfer process, so this resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S5602: Yes), the process proceeds to S5603. Also, as a result of the process of S5601, when the transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 267 (S5601: No), the process proceeds to S5603.

  In the process of S5603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 265 has been transferred (S5603). A transfer instruction for the image controller 267 is set so that the image data to be transferred resides from the character ROM 264 to the resident video RAM 265 (S5604). A transfer instruction for transferring character data in the untransferred display language data storage area 264d2 to the display language data storage area 265c is set (S5605).

  As a result, transfer data information related to untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 267 in the drawing process, and the image controller 267 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 264 to the resident video RAM 266. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 264 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 265), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 265 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 267 executes image transfer processing based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 264, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 267a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 266. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 266. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 261.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S5603 (S5603: Yes), the simple image display flag 263c is set to OFF (S5606), and the resident image transfer setting process (S5502) is ended. . Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 54B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S4512 in FIG. 54B) and the simple display setting process (see S4513 in FIG. 54B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 55 to 58) and the display setting process (see FIG. 59) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the normal image is displayed on the side display device 901. Is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 264 is performed to the normal video RAM 266 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 61) (see S5501: No in FIG. 60A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 261 removes all the resident video RAMs 265 to reside in the resident video RAM 265 except the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 264 to the resident video RAM 265. Then, the MPU 261 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 265 to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 265 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 265 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 265 is transferred to the resident video RAM 265, the sub display control device 900 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 265 while using the image controller. At 267, image drawing processing can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 265, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 264 constituted by the NAND flash memory 264a having a low reading speed when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the drawn image can be displayed on the side display device 901.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S5503) that is one process of the transfer setting process (S4505) executed by the MPU 261 of the sub display control apparatus 900 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S5503).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 263f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 263e by the pointer update process (S5003) of the display setting process (S4503) executed earlier is used. The information described at the indicated address is acquired (S5701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S5702). If it is transfer data information (S5702: Yes), the character ROM 264 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 263 (the storage source start address), the end address (storage source end address), and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 266) start address. In step S5703, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 263 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S5704), and the process proceeds to step S5705.

  In the process of S5702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S5702: No), the processes of S5703 and S5704 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S5705. In the processing of S5705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 267 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S5705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S5705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 267 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S5706).

  In the process of S5706, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 267 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 267, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S5706 that the transfer process has not been completed (S5706: No), the image controller 267 continues the image transfer process. Therefore, the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S5706: Yes), the process proceeds to S5707. Also, as a result of the processing of S5705, when the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 267 after the previous transfer processing is completed (S5705: No), the processing proceeds to S5707.

  In the process of S5707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S5707). If the transfer start flag is on (S5707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S5708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer in the process of S5703 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S5709. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S5707: No), this process ends.

  In the process of S5709, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 266 (S5709). The determination in the process of S5709 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 263i. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 263i and the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 266 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 266.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 266 as a result of the processing in S5709 (S5709: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 264 to the normal video RAM 266. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress the wasteful transfer of image data from the character ROM 264 to the normal video RAM 266, reducing the processing load on each part of the sub display control device 900, and reducing the traffic on the bus line 260. Can be achieved.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 266 as a result of the processing of S5709 (S5709: No), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S5710). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 267 in the drawing process, and the image controller 267 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 264 to the normal video RAM 266. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 264 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 266), and transfer destination (transfer here). The head address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 266a of the normal video RAM 266 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 267 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 264, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 266). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 261.

  After the process of S5710, the stored image data determination flag 263i is updated (S5711), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 263i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and substituting the same image storage area 266a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  In the present embodiment, the sub display data table is a display data table according to a command (for example, sub display spec information command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. A transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 263e in accordance with the setting in the buffer 263d. Then, the MPU 261 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 267 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 263f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 263e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 263d is surely transferred from the character ROM 264 to the normal video RAM 266 at a desired timing. Can do.

  Here, in the transfer data table, the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 266a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the sub display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 264 to the image storage area 266a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, and according to the display data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 265 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 266a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 264 is configured by the NAND flash memory 264a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 264 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 266. A corresponding display mode can be displayed on the side display device 901 while drawing an image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 265 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 264 to the normal video RAM 266.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 264 to the normal video RAM 266 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 264 to the normal video RAM 266 in sprite units, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the details of the language setting process (S4508) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 261 of the sub display control apparatus 900, will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the language setting process (S4508). In this language setting processing (S4508), display setting of a language setting screen, language selection processing by a touch operation, and the like are executed.

  In the language setting process (FIG. 62, S4508), first, it is determined whether or not the language setting flag 263r is set to ON (S5101). The language setting flag 263r is a flag indicating whether or not the language setting screen is displayed. If it is determined that the language setting flag 263r is off (S5101: No), this processing is terminated because the language setting is not in a state to be executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5101 that the language setting flag 263r is on (S5101: Yes), the language setting screen (see FIG. 5A) is displayed on the side display device 901. Determine if it exists. Here, whether or not the language setting screen (see FIG. 5A) is displayed is determined by determining whether or not the language setting sub display data table is set in the display data table buffer 263d. .

  In the process of S5102, when it is determined that the language setting screen (see FIG. 5A) is displayed on the side display device 901 (S5102: Yes), the language display area on the display screen of the side display device 901 is displayed. It is determined whether a touch operation has been performed (S5103). Whether or not this determination is a region indicating the language (within the t region in FIG. 5A) by determining the display information displayed at the touch-operated coordinates from the set sub display data table. Determine. If it is determined that the language display area is not touch-operated (S5103: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the language region has been touched (S5103: Yes), the setting value (information) indicating the language corresponding to the touch operation is stored in the display language setting value storage area, and the corresponding language Is set in the sub display data table in which the display language pointer is set (S5104). Thereafter, this process is terminated. Here, the display language pointer in the process of S5104 sets a display (t area) indicating the selected language on the language setting screen (see FIG. 5A).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5102 that the language setting screen (see FIG. 5A) is not set (S5102: No), the language setting screen (see FIG. 5A) is displayed on the side display device. A sub display data table for display setting is set to 901. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Next, the details of the above-described input detection process (S4509), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 261 of the sub display control apparatus 900, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing this input detection processing (S4509). In this input detection process (S4509), it is determined whether the touch panel of the side display device 901 has been touched, and each process or setting is executed based on the determination result.

  In the input detection process (FIG. 63, S4509), first, it is determined whether the language switching icon 901e (see FIG. 5B) has been pressed (S5201). Here, based on the touched coordinates, it is determined whether the coordinates are set coordinates of the language switching icon 901e in the sub display data table in which the coordinates are set. If it is determined that the language switch icon 901e has been pressed (S5201: Yes), the language setting flag 263r is set to ON (S5202). Thereafter, the process of S5203 is executed. By setting the language switching icon 901e to ON, the language setting screen shown in FIG. 5A is set to be displayed on the side display device 901 by S5105 of the language setting process (S4508 of FIG. 62). . On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5201 that the language switching icon 901e has not been pressed (S5201: No), step S5203 is executed.

  In the process of S5203, it is determined that the language setting icon 901k (see FIG. 5A) has been pressed. The language setting icon 901k is an icon displayed when the language setting screen shown in FIG. 5A is displayed on the side display device 901.

  If it is determined that the language setting icon 901k is not pressed (S5203: No), the process proceeds to S5208. On the other hand, if it is determined that the language setting icon 901k has been pressed (S5203: Yes), the language setting flag 263r is set to OFF (S5204). A display language setting flag 263p corresponding to the language stored in the display language setting value storage area 263s is set (S5206). The status flag 263n is set to ON (S5207). Thereafter, the process of S5208 is executed. Here, when the state flag 263n is set to ON, S5008 of the display setting process (FIG. 59, S4503) described above from the language setting screen (see FIG. 5A) to the display mode based on the current gaming state. As a result, the display content of the side display device 901 is switched.

  In the process of S5208, it is determined whether or not the next icon 901m is pressed on the language setting screen (see FIG. 5A) (S5208). If it is determined that the next icon 901m has not been pressed (S5208: No), the processing of S5210 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the next icon 901m has been pressed (S5208: Yes), a sub display data table corresponding to the next screen (next page) of the sub display data table of the set language setting screen is displayed. It is set in the buffer 263d (S5209). Thereafter, the process of S5210 is executed.

  In the process of S5210, it is determined whether the return icon 901n on the language setting screen (see FIG. 5A) has been pressed (S5210). If it is determined that the return icon 901n has not been pressed (S5210: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5210 that the return icon 901n has been pressed (S5210: Yes), the sub display data table in the language setting screen currently set in the display data table buffer 263d is displayed. The sub display data table of the language setting screen corresponding to the page is set in the display data table buffer 263d (S5211). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  As described above, the language setting and the switching of the language setting screen can be performed by the touch operation of the side display device 900. Therefore, it is possible to switch to the language desired by the player with an easy operation.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64, details of the above-described camera setting process (S4510) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 261 of the sub display control apparatus 900 will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this camera setting process (S4510). In this camera setting process (S4510), image data captured from the camera 303 connected to the sub-display control apparatus 900 is determined, and language setting is performed based on the determination result.

  In the camera setting process (FIG. 64, S4510), first, it is determined whether or not the demo state is set in the state storage area 263m (S5301). Here, when the demo state is stored in the state storage area 263m, it indicates that the demo screen can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (including between the demo and the demo). ing.

  In the process of S5301, if the demo state is stored in the state storage area 263m (S5301: Yes), it is determined whether the human sensor 304 is on (S5302). Here, when the human sensor 304 is on, there is a player (person) in front of the pachinko machine 10. The presence of a person means being at a distance where a gameable distance (launching handle) can be grasped. If it is determined in the processing of S5302 that the human sensor 304 is on (S5302: Yes), image data (image data of the player's face) is read from the camera 303 (S5303). Face recognition processing is executed based on the read image data (S5304). Thereafter, the process of S5305 is executed. Here, this face recognition is already known, and the color of the skin, the color of the hair, etc. are discriminated. On the other hand, when the state stored in the state storage area 263m is not the demo state (S5301: No), and when the human sensor 304 is off (S5302: No), this process is terminated.

  In the process of S5305, it is determined whether the result of the face recognition executed in S5304 is Japanese (S5306). Here, the determination as to whether or not the user is Japanese is executed based on whether the hair color is not blond or the black eye color is black. If it is determined in step S5305 that the user is Japanese (S5305: Yes), the display language setting flag 263p corresponding to Japanese is set (S5306). Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5305 that the face recognition result is not Japanese (S5305: No), the display language setting flag 263p corresponding to English is set (S5307). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to be provided with a changeover switch that is set so as not to execute the camera setting process (FIG. 64, S4510) or to perform the face recognition process. Furthermore, a microphone may be provided in the pachinko machine 10 so that the sub display control device 900 or the like performs switching corresponding to the language based on the language spoken by the player toward the microphone.

  In this embodiment, the face recognition is performed and the language setting is performed based on the determination result. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the arrangement of language types displayed on the language setting screen based on the face recognition determination result is described. The order may be changed and displayed. Here, the nationality of the player is determined from the recognition result of face recognition, and if it is Asian, Japanese, Chinese, Korean, etc. are displayed at the top of the first page, and if it is a white player For example, English, French, English, Russian, etc. are displayed at the top of the first page. Therefore, since the order displayed by the player is changed, it is possible to easily find and select a language corresponding to the player from a plurality of language candidates. Further, the player may speak the language toward the pachinko machine 10 by voice recognition or the like so that the corresponding language is displayed in the upper order (topmost) of the language setting screen. In addition, when the language setting screen is displayed, the player speaks the language toward the pachinko machine 10 so that the order of the displayed languages can be rearranged so that the corresponding language is in the higher order. It may be configured.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the details of the above-described launch detection process (S4511) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 261 of the sub display control apparatus 900 will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing this launch detection process (S4511). In this launch detection process (S4511), a process of switching the display mode of the side display device 901 to a display mode corresponding to the set game state is detected when it is detected that a game ball has been launched during the demo state.

  In the firing detection process (FIG. 65, S4511), first, it is determined whether or not a demo state is stored in the state storage area 263m (S5401). Here, when the demo state is stored in the state storage area 263m, it is stored that the demo state is in addition to the already stored game state.

  If the demo state is not set in the state storage area 263m, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is stored in the state storage area 263m that it is in the demo state (S5401: Yes), it is determined whether or not the firing sensor 305 is set to ON (S5402). As shown in FIG. 2, the firing sensor 305 is attached as a gate type (magnetic detection type) sensor to the exit of the launch rail of the game board 13.

  In the process of S5402, if the firing sensor 305 is off (S5402: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5402 that the firing sensor 305 is on (S5402: Yes), the demo state set in the state storage area 263m is switched to the information on the gaming state only (S5403). ). The status flag 263n is set to ON (S5404). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  As described above, when the launch is detected in the demonstration state, the state flag 263n is set to ON so that the display mode according to the gaming state is displayed on the side display device 901. As described above, the display mode displayed on the side display device 901 according to the gaming state (including the jackpot state) in which the state flag 263n is set to ON by the process of S5008 of the display setting process (FIG. 59, S4503). Is switched. Therefore, when the player starts the game, explanation of the game can be displayed on the side display device 901, and the game can be played in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In the present embodiment, the firing sensor 305 is provided separately. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The touch sensor 51a of the firing handle 51 is detected, and the display mode of the side display device 901 is switched when the handle is gripped during the demonstration. It may be set. Further, the display mode may be set to be switched based on the player touching the side display device 901 during the demonstration state.

  In the configuration of the present embodiment, since the side display device 901 is provided separately from the third symbol display device 81 so as to be rotatable on the right side of the pachinko machine 10, in addition to the effects of the third symbol display device 81, A wide variety of display effects can be achieved. Furthermore, by being able to rotate, it can be rotated to an angle that is easy for the player to see, or can be rotated to a position that does not interfere with the adjacent pachinko machine. Further, since the side display device 901 is of a touch panel type, the screen can be directly touched and operated easily by the player.

  In addition, since the side display device 901 can be used to set the language, it is possible to make the game in an easy-to-understand manner for players with different languages. Furthermore, since the character that announces the degree of jackpot expectation is set so as to be switched according to the language, the degree of jackpot expectation can be reported in an easy-to-understand manner according to the nationality of the player.

  Also, since the display mode displayed on the side display device 901 is switched based on the gaming state (normal gaming state, probability variation gaming state, short-time gaming state, jackpot start, jackpot end), the gaming state has shifted. This can be recognized by the side display device 901. Moreover, since the game method in each game state is displayed on the side display device 901 in an easy-to-understand manner, troubles that are confusing even when the game state is shifted can be suppressed.

  Moreover, since the installation location of the pachinko machine 10 is identified by the GPS 302 and set in a language according to the location, it is possible to suppress the trouble of setting the language every time the power is turned on.

  In the present embodiment, the sub display control device 900 is configured such that the set language is not backed up when the power is interrupted. It may be configured to notify the sound lamp control device 113 about the set language at times.

  Moreover, you may set so that the display mode displayed on the side display device 901 by a player's operation can be switched. Specifically, since an experienced player does not need a game description or the like, it may be synchronized with the content displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or a special lottery effect (special) on the side display device 901. (Synchronization with symbol variation) may be executed.

  Furthermore, it may be configured such that game statistics (the number of histories of the selected variation pattern type, the number of jackpots, the total number of balls), and the like can be displayed. In the present embodiment, the side display device 901 is a touch panel, but is not limited thereto, and may be a normal liquid crystal display device. Further, the display content and language setting of the side display device 901 may be set by voice recognition.

  Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepacchi, a sparrow ball, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device that displays a fixed display of symbols after variably displaying a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is not provided. Things. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  In the present embodiment, the electrical configuration is configured such that the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the sub display control device 900, etc. share the control of the pachinko machine 10. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the control may be executed by a single integrated control device. Also, a control device that integrates all or part of the control devices other than the main control device 110 may be used.

  It should be noted that all or part of the above-described configurations and modifications may be combined.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments are shown.

<Feature A group> (Switch language)
Display means for displaying at least character information indicating the contents of the game, storage means for storing the character information corresponding to a plurality of types of languages displayed on the display means, and the characters displayed on the display means Determining means for determining a language type of information based on establishment of a predetermined condition; and display control means for acquiring the character information corresponding to the language type determined by the determining means from the storage means and displaying the character information on the display means A gaming machine A1 characterized by comprising:

  Here, for example, there is known a pachinko machine that performs lottery with a winning of a game ball at the start opening, and displays a variation effect or a jackpot effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such effects, characters are displayed and the player is notified of the content of the game, the state of the game, and the like. In such a pachinko machine, there has been proposed one in which various comments and the like are displayed as characters on a liquid crystal display so that the player can play the game more easily (for example, JP-A-2007-105333). In this case, the displayed language is only displayed in characters of a predetermined language, and the game becomes monotonous by not being able to switch to a different language, and the player gets bored early. there were.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the language type displayed on the display means can be switched based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, so that the contents of the game can be displayed in various languages and varied among the players. Can be performed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine A1, the game machine A1 includes a selection unit that allows a player to select one language type from a plurality of language types, and a determination unit that determines the language type selected by the selection unit, The game machine A2 is characterized in that the means determines the language type determined by the determination means.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1, the player can select a language type, so that it can be displayed with character information according to the language desired by the player, There is an effect that it is possible to play the game easily.

  The gaming machine A3 includes a language information display unit that displays language information indicating language types that can be selected by the selection unit.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2, there is an effect that the language type can be easily selected by the selection means.

  In the gaming machine A3, the language information display means is provided separately from the display means, and the selection means is 1 when the player touches the language information displayed on the language information display means. The gaming machine A4 is configured to be selectable in any language.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3, the language type can be selected by touching the language information display means provided separately from the display means, so that information displayed on the display means is hindered. There is an effect that the language type can be selected while suppressing this.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, the lottery means for executing the lottery and the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means are dynamically displayed on the display means for a predetermined period and then stopped. Dynamic display means for displaying, and privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating the specific lottery result is stopped and displayed by the dynamic display means. A gaming machine A5 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the display means displays identification information indicating the lottery result, so that a specific lottery result is expected to be displayed. It is possible to play games.

  In the gaming machine A5, during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, a notice display that displays on the display means a notice display mode indicating the degree of expectation that the lottery result is a specific lottery result. Means, a notice selection means for selecting the type of the notice display mode displayed by the notice display means based on the lottery result by the lottery means, and the notice selection means based on the language type determined by the decision means. A gaming machine A6 comprising switching means for switching the selected notice display mode to the notice display mode corresponding to the determined language type.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A5, the notice display mode indicating the degree of expectation can be switched according to the determined language type, so that the display mode according to the nationality etc. of the player There is an effect that the expected degree can be notified.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, a voice output unit capable of outputting at least a voice indicating the content of the game, and a voice storage storing voice data corresponding to the plurality of language types output by the voice output unit And a voice selection unit that selects voice data corresponding to the language type determined by the determination unit from the voice storage unit.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the output voice can be matched with the language determined by the determining means, so that the player can play the game more easily. There is an effect that can be.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the game machine has a position identifying unit capable of identifying current location information, and the determining unit determines a language type corresponding to the current location information identified by the position identifying unit. A gaming machine A8 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects exerted on any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the language corresponding to the location information where the gaming machine is installed can be determined. There is an effect that can be done.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, there is provided image information acquisition means capable of acquiring the player's image information and nationality determination means for determining the player's nationality from the image information acquired by the image information acquisition means. The game machine A9 is characterized in that the determination means determines a language type based on the nationality determined by the nationality determination means.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, it is possible to determine and display the language according to the nationality of the player, so that the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner There is an effect that can be.

  In any one of the gaming machines A5 to A9, setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states based on a predetermined opportunity, and game information based on the gaming state set by the setting means is displayed on the display means A gaming machine A10 having gaming information display means to be displayed on the gaming machine A10.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A5 to A9, the game information is displayed on the display means based on the change in the game state, so that the player can easily understand the change in the game state. There is an effect that can be done.

  In the gaming machine A10, the gaming information includes a display mode indicating a gaming method in a set gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine A10, the gaming method based on the gaming state is displayed as the gaming information, so that even if the gaming method is changed, the player can play the game in an easily understandable manner. There is an effect.

  The gaming machine A10 or A11 has lottery probability setting means for setting a lottery probability of the lottery means based on the gaming state, and the game information includes the lottery probability set by the lottery probability setting means. A gaming machine A12 characterized in that it includes information to be shown.

  According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine A10 or A11, the lottery probability set based on the gaming state can be identified by the displayed gaming information, so that the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner. There is an effect that can be done.

<Characteristic B group> (Description of game method in side display)
Based on the establishment of the lottery condition, the lottery means for executing the lottery, the first display means for displaying the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, and the identification showing the specific lottery result on the first display means When the information is displayed, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player, and the game state of the game, the first game state and the first game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state. A game state setting means that can be set by switching between two game states; a second display means that is different from the first display means; and a second display that causes the second display means to display game information different from the identification information. And a switching means for switching the content of the game information displayed by the second display control means based on the gaming state set by the gaming state setting means. Machine B1.

  Here, for example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, whether or not a game is successful is determined based on a predetermined lottery probability when a lottery condition established in accordance with winning of a game ball at a starting port or the like is established. If it is determined that the game is successful, it is determined whether or not the lottery probability is shifted to a high probability advantageous to the player. If it is determined that the lottery is shifted, the lottery probability is high. There is known a gaming machine that is shifted to a gaming state set to “1”. As described above, a gaming machine in which a variety of games are made by shifting to a plurality of gaming states has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-125820).

  On the other hand, when a plurality of game states are switched and set, the game content becomes complicated, and it is difficult for the player to recognize the content of the game state set.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the game information different from the identification information is switched based on the gaming state and displayed on the second display means, so that the player can easily identify the switching of the gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible for the player to play the game easily.

  In the gaming machine B1, a entrance that allows a game ball to enter, a determination unit that determines whether the lottery condition is satisfied based on the entrance into the entrance, and the specific lottery result by the lottery unit And a probability setting means for varying the lottery probability to be drawn based on the gaming state, and the probability indicating the lottery probability set by the probability setting means as the game information displayed by the second display means A gaming machine B2 including at least information.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1, the lottery probability that is varied depending on the gaming state is displayed as the game information on the second display means, so that the game can be performed by correctly recognizing the lottery probability. There is an effect that can be done.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the gaming machine B1 or B2 has a privilege game determining means for determining a type of privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, and the game information displayed on the second display means includes the privilege game determining means. Information on the type of privilege game determined by the game machine B3 is included.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the type of privilege game being executed can be confirmed by the game information displayed on the second display means, and the player can play the privilege game. There is an effect that it can be performed easily.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, when the launching means capable of launching a game ball in the game area, the detection means for detecting that the game ball has been launched by the launching means, and the lottery condition are not satisfied for a predetermined period Standby display means for displaying a predetermined standby display mode on the second display means, and the switching means, when the standby display mode is displayed on the second display means, A gaming machine B4 that switches from the standby display mode to gaming information based on the set gaming state based on the detection of the game ball being detected by the detecting means. .

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B2 or B3, the detection means detects that the player has started the game, and the display mode of the second display unit is changed to the display mode that matches the start of the game. There is an effect that it can be switched.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the game information displayed on the second display means includes a notification mode for notifying a player of the position of the entrance. Game machine B5.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the position of the entrance is displayed on the second display means, so that the player can recognize the gaming method from the gaming information. effective.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the player can select language variable means for changing the language type displayed on the first display means and the second display means, and the language type that can be changed by the language variable means. A gaming machine B6 having language designation means that can be designated.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of playing any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the language type specified by the player can be changed, so that the player can easily play the game. There is.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the second display unit includes an operation determination unit that can determine that the player has touched the display area, and the second display control unit includes the operation determination unit. The gaming machine B7 is characterized in that the content of the game information to be displayed is made variable based on the determination result by.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the content of the gaming information can be varied by touching the second display means, so that the gaming information suitable for the player is displayed. Thus, there is an effect that a variety of games can be made.

  In any one of the gaming machines B4 to B7, as the entrance, a first entrance and a second entrance different from the first entrance are provided and set by the gaming state setting means And an entry setting means for setting a type of entry entrance that is advantageous to the player based on the game state played, and the game information displayed by the second display means includes A gaming machine B8 characterized in that it includes entry information indicating an advantageous entrance.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of playing any of the gaming machines B4 to B7, it is possible to inform about the entrance that is advantageous to the player, so that it is possible to easily inform the gaming method advantageous to the player. is there.

  Each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine Z1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and in response to the operation of the operation handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined game area, and the ball is placed in a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through a prize opening), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine, and the gaming machine Z2. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

Each gaming machine is a gaming machine Z3, which is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine that draws a lottery in accordance with a winning game ball at a starting port and displays a variation effect or a jackpot effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such effects, characters are displayed and the player is notified of the content of the game, the state of the game, and the like. In such a pachinko machine, there has been proposed an apparatus that allows a player to play a game in an easy-to-understand manner by displaying various comments on a liquid crystal display in characters. (For example, patent document 1: Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2007-105333).
In this type of pachinko machine, the displayed language is only displayed in characters of a predetermined language, and the game becomes monotonous by not being able to switch to a different language, and the player gets bored early. There was a bug that would
The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a player from getting bored early.
<Means>
To achieve this object, the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 includes a display unit that displays at least character information indicating the contents of the game, and the character information corresponding to a plurality of types of languages displayed on the display unit. Is stored, determining means for determining the language type of the character information displayed on the display means based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and the character information corresponding to the language type determined by the determining means Is acquired from the storage means and displayed on the display means.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, at least character information indicating the content of the game is displayed on the display means. Character information corresponding to a plurality of types of languages displayed on the display means is stored in the storage means. The language type of the character information displayed on the display means is determined by the determination means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. Character information corresponding to the language type determined by the determining means is acquired from the memory means and displayed on the display means by the display control means.
Accordingly, since the language type displayed on the display means can be switched based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the contents of the game are displayed in various languages and various effects are given to the player. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
64 First entrance (part of entrance means)
81 3rd symbol display device (part of effect display means)
110 Main control means (part of privilege grant means, part of setting means)
112a Ball launch unit (launch means)
234d2 Display language data storage area (part of storage means)
901 Side display device (part of information display means)
S904 privilege game execution means
Part of S2401 acquisition means, part of selection means
Part of S2601 acquisition means, part of selection means
Part of S2701 acquisition means, part of selection means
S2801 Part of acquisition unit, part of selection unit S2902 Part of display control unit S5008 Part of display control unit, part of acquisition unit, part of selection unit S5205 Determination unit

Claims (2)

A launching means capable of launching a game ball;
A plurality of entrance means capable of entering game balls launched by the launch means; and
Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the entrance means, a privilege grant means for giving a benefit that is advantageous to the player;
A setting means for setting a ball entry means that is likely to be advantageous to a player among the plurality of ball entry means based on a gaming state;
Information display means for displaying information including at least character information as information corresponding to the entrance means set advantageously by the setting means;
Effect display means for displaying at least one of character information indicating at least the content of the game and a predetermined effect;
When a specific effect is displayed on the effect display means, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player;
Determining means for determining a language type corresponding to the character information displayed on each of the information display means and the effect display means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition from a plurality of language types;
Different specific addresses are set for each of the language types determined by the determining means, set to a plurality of addresses moved from the specific addresses corresponding to a plurality of address information respectively indicating predetermined addresses, A plurality of individual storage areas in which character information of the language type corresponding to the specific address is stored, and the individual set to an address moved corresponding to the same address information from the specific address Storage means for storing the character information indicating the same display content in a storage area corresponding to the language type of the individual storage area;
Obtaining means for obtaining the address information corresponding to the display content of the character information displayed on the information display means or the effect display means based on establishment of a display condition;
The character information stored in the individual storage area moved by an address corresponding to the address information acquired by the acquiring unit with the specific address corresponding to the language type determined by the determining unit as a reference A selection means for selecting
A display control means for displaying the character information selected by the selection means on the information display means or the effect display means. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the effect display means is arranged at a position where a player can visually recognize the effect display means.

Images